Prove2Me
Navigate
DiscoverCollectionsFormalpediaBlogsUsersMomentumMy Missions+
Prove2Me
⌕
Log in

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

Operations Research

2,721 missions · 1,446 completed

The discipline of applying mathematical analysis to complex decision problems in operations: allocating scarce resources, scheduling, routing, inventory, and the design of service and production systems. Drawing on mathematical programming, stochastic modeling, queueing, simulation, and game-theoretic reasoning, it seeks policies that perform provably well in systems shaped by constraints, congestion, and uncertainty.

Missions

Open1275Completed1446All2721
AnalysisOptimizationStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Dynamic Scheduling with Convex Delay Costs: The Generalized cμ Rule: Policies Equalizing the Indices μ_k c_k(W_k/ρ_k) Attain the Heavy-Traffic Lower Bound on Cumulative Delay CostResearch Paper

Motivation

A single server shared by several classes of jobs must decide, at every moment, which class to work on. When each class kkk incurs a linear delay cost ckc_kck​ per unit of waiting time and needs mean service time 1/μk1/\mu_k1/μk​, the classical cμc\mucμ rule (serve the waiting class with the largest ckμkc_k\mu_kck​μk​) minimizes expected cost in many settings, from the M/G/1 queue to discrete-time models (Buyukkoc, Varaiya and Walrand, Adv. Appl. Probab. 1985). Linear costs are a strong restriction: in telecommunications, manufacturing and service systems the penalty for delay often grows faster than linearly, and with convex costs the static priority order of the cμc\mucμ rule is no longer optimal.

Van Mieghem (Ann. Appl. Probab. 1995) proposed the generalized cμc\mucμ rule: with nondecreasing convex delay costs CkC_kCk​ and marginal costs ck=Ck′c_k = C_k'ck​=Ck′​, serve the class with the largest index μkck(⋅)\mu_k c_k(\cdot)μk​ck​(⋅) evaluated at its current delay or workload. The paper proves that, in heavy traffic, this dynamic index policy is asymptotically optimal among all scheduling policies, including policies whose scaled workloads do not converge. This mission formalizes that result and the chain of propositions it rests on.

Setting

There are ddd job classes. In the nnnth system, the iiith class-kkk job arrives after an interarrival time uk,in>0u^n_{k,i}>0uk,in​>0 and needs service vk,in≥0v^n_{k,i}\ge 0vk,in​≥0. Akn(t)A^n_k(t)Akn​(t) counts class-kkk arrivals in [0,t][0,t][0,t] and Skn(x)S^n_k(x)Skn​(x) counts class-kkk completions within xxx units of server time. A policy is an allocation Tn=(Tkn)T^n=(T^n_k)Tn=(Tkn​), where Tkn(t)T^n_k(t)Tkn​(t) is the time in [0,t][0,t][0,t] spent on class kkk. From it come the headcount Nkn=Akn−Skn∘TknN^n_k = A^n_k - S^n_k\circ T^n_kNkn​=Akn​−Skn​∘Tkn​, the workload Wkn(t)=Vkn(Akn(t))−Tkn(t)W^n_k(t) = V^n_k(A^n_k(t)) - T^n_k(t)Wkn​(t)=Vkn​(Akn​(t))−Tkn​(t) (work present in class kkk), the class-FIFO delay τkn(t)=inf⁡{s≥0:Wkn(t)≤Tkn(t+s)−Tkn(t)}\tau^n_k(t)=\inf\{s\ge0: W^n_k(t)\le T^n_k(t+s)-T^n_k(t)\}τkn​(t)=inf{s≥0:Wkn​(t)≤Tkn​(t+s)−Tkn​(t)} of a job arriving at ttt, and the cumulative cost Jn(t)=∑k∑i≤Akn(t)Ckn(τk,in)J^n(t)=\sum_k\sum_{i\le A^n_k(t)} C^n_k(\tau^n_{k,i})Jn(t)=∑k​∑i≤Akn​(t)​Ckn​(τk,in​). Feasible policies are continuous, nondecreasing and work conserving.

The nnnth system runs on [0,n][0,n][0,n] and is studied at the diffusion scale: W~kn(t)=Wkn(nt)/n\tilde W^n_k(t)=W^n_k(nt)/\sqrt nW~kn​(t)=Wkn​(nt)/n​, N~kn\tilde N^n_kN~kn​, τ~kn\tilde\tau^n_kτ~kn​ likewise, and J~n(t)=Jn(nt)/n\tilde J^n(t)=J^n(nt)/nJ~n(t)=Jn(nt)/n. Arrival and service processes expand as An(nt)=nAˉn(t)+n A~n(t)+o(n)A^n(nt)=n\bar A^n(t)+\sqrt n\,\tilde A^n(t)+o(\sqrt n)An(nt)=nAˉn(t)+n​A~n(t)+o(n​) and Sn(nt)=nSˉn(t)+n S~n(t)+o(n)S^n(nt)=n\bar S^n(t)+\sqrt n\,\tilde S^n(t)+o(\sqrt n)Sn(nt)=nSˉn(t)+n​S~n(t)+o(n​). Assumption 1 asks that these terms converge, with rates λ=Aˉ∗′>0\lambda=\bar A^{*\prime}>0λ=Aˉ∗′>0, μ=Sˉ∗′>0\mu=\bar S^{*\prime}>0μ=Sˉ∗′>0, and that the system is in heavy traffic: n(R+n−e)→c~∗\sqrt n(R^n_+-e)\to\tilde c^*n​(R+n​−e)→c~∗, where Rkn=(Sˉkn)−1∘AˉknR^n_k=(\bar S^n_k)^{-1}\circ\bar A^n_kRkn​=(Sˉkn​)−1∘Aˉkn​ and ρk=λk/μk\rho_k=\lambda_k/\mu_kρk​=λk​/μk​ is the traffic intensity. Assumption 2 asks that the costs scale, Cn(n ⋅)→C∗(⋅)C^n(\sqrt n\,\cdot)\to C^*(\cdot)Cn(n​⋅)→C∗(⋅), and Assumption 3 that C∗C^*C∗ be strictly convex and C1\mathcal C^1C1.

The scaled total workload has a policy-independent limit W~+∗=φ(L~+∗+c~∗)\tilde W^*_+=\varphi(\tilde L^*_++\tilde c^*)W~+∗​=φ(L~+∗​+c~∗), with φ\varphiφ the one-dimensional reflection map. The key static problem splits a total yyy among classes:

g∘y(t)=arg⁡min⁡x∈R+d, ∑kxk=y(t) ∑kλk(t) Ck∗(xkρk(t)).(43)g\circ y(t)=\arg\min_{x\in\mathbb R^d_+,\ \sum_k x_k=y(t)}\ \sum_k\lambda_k(t)\,C^*_k\Big(\frac{x_k}{\rho_k(t)}\Big). \tag{43}g∘y(t)=argx∈R+d​, ∑k​xk​=y(t)min​ k∑​λk​(t)Ck∗​(ρk​(t)xk​​).(43)

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 7

Under Assumptions 1–3, for feasible policies with

max⁡k,l∥μkck∗(W~knρk)−μlcl∗(W~lnρl)∥→0,(51)\max_{k,l}\Big\|\mu_kc^*_k\Big(\frac{\tilde W^n_k}{\rho_k}\Big)-\mu_lc^*_l\Big(\frac{\tilde W^n_l}{\rho_l}\Big)\Big\|\to0, \tag{51}k,lmax​​μk​ck∗​(ρk​W~kn​​)−μl​cl∗​(ρl​W~ln​​)​→0,(51)

the costs and delays converge,

J~n→J~∗=∑k∫λkCk∗([g∘W~+∗]kρk)dt,τ~n→g∘W~+∗ρ.(52–53)\tilde J^n\to\tilde J^*=\sum_k\int\lambda_kC^*_k\Big(\frac{[g\circ\tilde W^*_+]_k}{\rho_k}\Big)dt,\qquad \tilde\tau^n\to\frac{g\circ\tilde W^*_+}{\rho}. \tag{52–53}J~n→J~∗=k∑​∫λk​Ck∗​(ρk​[g∘W~+∗​]k​​)dt,τ~n→ρg∘W~+∗​​.(52–53)

Milestones

Lemma 1 and Proposition 2 (jumps (33)–(34), first-order allocation (27), total workload (32), boundedness, equivalences (35)); Proposition 3 (μkW~kn−N~kn→0\mu_k\tilde W^n_k-\tilde N^n_k\to0μk​W~kn​−N~kn​→0); Proposition 4 (Little's law); Proposition 5 (converging policies); uniqueness and continuity of ggg (§4.1); the Kuhn–Tucker characterization (46)–(50); and Proposition 6, the lower bound

lim inf⁡nJ~n(t)≥J~∗(t)for every feasible policy sequence.(44)\liminf_n\tilde J^n(t)\ge\tilde J^*(t)\qquad\text{for every feasible policy sequence.}\tag{44}nliminf​J~n(t)≥J~∗(t)for every feasible policy sequence.(44)

Proposition 6 is what makes Proposition 7 an optimality statement; it is a separate milestone and not part of the goal.

Significance

The result. Proposition 7 identifies a simple, myopic index rule that is optimal at the diffusion scale for every time simultaneously, for arbitrary convex delay costs and nonstationary rates. It extends the cμc\mucμ rule beyond linear costs, links it to the "hug the optimal workload curve" policies of heavy-traffic control, and shows that the instantaneous allocation problem (43) is all that matters asymptotically. Later work on Brownian control of multiclass queues and on convex-cost scheduling (Mandelbaum and Stolyar 2004) builds on this.

Formalizing it. The paper's proofs are short and informal at several points, and the formalization makes these points explicit: the domain of every uniform limit, the policy class, and the reading of μ\muμ. No part of this paper has a machine-checked proof. A completed mission would give a verified heavy-traffic analysis of a multiclass single-server queue at the sample-path level, the first on the platform with a deterministic diffusion scaling and an explicit reflection map.

Difficulty

The obvious route is to show that W~n\tilde W^nW~n converges and then pass to the limit in the cost. That fails for the lower bound: Proposition 6 must cover policies whose class workloads never converge (polling-type policies), so it cannot use compactness of W~n\tilde W^nW~n and must instead compare the cost of an arbitrary split of W~+n\tilde W^n_+W~+n​ with the optimal split, locally in time. For the goal, (51) controls only the indices, so the convergence of W~n\tilde W^nW~n must be extracted from (51) through the inverse marginal costs, the convergence of the total workload, and the Kuhn–Tucker conditions of (43). Delay convergence then needs a uniform control of T~n\tilde T^nT~n over windows of length O(n−1/2)O(n^{-1/2})O(n−1/2), and cost convergence needs the convergence of the costs CnC^nCn applied to delays of order n\sqrt nn​.

Formalization scope

Lean namespace GenCMu.HeavyTraffic. The development is deterministic and works one sample path at a time; the stochastic version (Proposition 8) is not part of this mission. Conventions committed to:

  • Classes are Fin d; job indices start at 111; every "→" between functions is uniform convergence ((11)), on [0,1][0,1][0,1] unless stated; lim inf⁡\liminfliminf is written as "eventually ≥\ge≥ bound −ε-\varepsilon−ε".
  • The scaled processes are defined exactly, with Tˉn=Lˉn=Rn\bar T^n=\bar L^n=R^nTˉn=Lˉn=Rn ((69), (75)); the inverse in (14) is the generalized inverse on [0,1][0,1][0,1].
  • The o(n1/2)o(n^{1/2})o(n1/2) terms of (12)–(13) are uniform in ttt. The trends converge in C1\mathcal C^1C1, not only in C\mathcal CC. Without this, Aˉn,Sˉn\bar A^n,\bar S^nAˉn,Sˉn can oscillate on the n−1/2n^{-1/2}n−1/2 scale and (33)–(34) and Proposition 3 fail. The service expansion holds on server time [0,2n][0,2n][0,2n], so that for d=1d=1d=1 in heavy traffic the service times of jobs arriving before nnn are covered.
  • μk\mu_kμk​ in (20), (36), (41), (46)–(51) is μk(Rk∗(t))\mu_k(R^*_k(t))μk​(Rk∗​(t)), the service rate in real time, so ρk=λk/μk(Rk∗)\rho_k=\lambda_k/\mu_k(R^*_k)ρk​=λk​/μk​(Rk∗​).
  • (38) is uniform on compacts. Assumption 3's interior clause is imposed where W~+∗(t)>0\tilde W^*_+(t)>0W~+∗​(t)>0. At W~+∗(t)=0\tilde W^*_+(t)=0W~+∗​(t)=0 no point of Ω={0}\Omega=\{0\}Ω={0} is interior, and the literal clause would make the goal vacuous.
  • For the heavy-traffic limit and goal, feasible policies satisfy F1 (without adaptedness), F2–F4, Wk≥0W_k\ge0Wk​≥0, work conservation (used by W+n=φ(Xn)W^n_+=\varphi(X^n)W+n​=φ(Xn)), and every job finishes. Proposition 6 uses a broader cost-admissible class that permits idleness with work waiting. Class-FIFO is built into the delay (9).
  • The delays of jobs arriving near the horizon depend on post-horizon service. We require the allocation on every bounded diffusion-scale window after nnn to advance at the first-order rates ρk(1)\rho_k(1)ρk​(1). This explicit boundary hypothesis keeps Propositions 2, 4, 5, and 7 on the paper's full [0,1][0,1][0,1].
  • Lemma 1 additionally assumes a common Lipschitz bound on the first-order partial-sum trends. Uniform convergence alone permits jumps of order n\sqrt nn​; the bound repairs that omission. Uniqueness of the solution of (43) is stated under strict convexity: "convex increasing" (p. 820) does not give it. (35) is stated without the implication from τ~n\tilde\tau^nτ~n back to W~n\tilde W^nW~n, which fails in the uniform topology.
  • J~∗\tilde J^*J~∗ integrates the optimal value of (43), so Proposition 6 needs no choice of minimizer.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: no theorem assumes the convergence of W~n\tilde W^nW~n or W~+n\tilde W^n_+W~+n​, the uniqueness of minimizers, or the lower bound, and the joint satisfiability of all hypotheses has been checked in Lean for d=1d=1d=1.

Needed infrastructure: sample-path reflection-map estimates, counting/partial-sum inversion with uniform o(n)o(\sqrt n)o(n​) errors, parametric convex optimization (Berge's theorem for (43)), and Riemann-sum arguments for the lower bound. The reflection-map and inversion lemmas are reusable beyond this mission. Contributions to any milestone are welcome. The definitions are frozen, so a proof that needs a different definition should be raised in the discussion.

Selected references

  • J. A. Van Mieghem, Dynamic Scheduling with Convex Delay Costs: The Generalized cμ Rule, Ann. Appl. Probab. 5(3) (1995) 809–833. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoap/1177004706
  • C. Buyukkoc, P. Varaiya, J. Walrand, The cμ rule revisited, Adv. Appl. Probab. 17 (1985) 237–238.
  • J. M. Harrison, Brownian Motion and Stochastic Flow Systems, Wiley, 1985 (reflection map).
  • D. L. Iglehart, W. Whitt, Multiple channel queues in heavy traffic. I, Adv. Appl. Probab. 2 (1970) 150–177.
  • A. Mandelbaum, A. L. Stolyar, Scheduling flexible servers with convex delay costs: heavy-traffic optimality of the generalized cμ-rule, Oper. Res. 52(6) (2004) 836–855. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.1040.0156
16 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex OptimizationProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Stochastic Convex Programming: Basic Duality 2: With a Bounded Second-Stage Set the Intrinsic First-Stage Problem Coincides with the One Induced by P and Recourse Is AttainedResearch Paper

Motivation

Two-stage stochastic programming with recourse models a decision taken in two steps: a first-stage decision x1x_1x1​ is fixed before a random outcome sss is observed, and a recourse decision x2(s)x_2(s)x2​(s) is taken afterwards, once sss is known. The model goes back to Dantzig (1955) and Beale (1955) and is the basic template of stochastic optimization in operations research: capacity planning before demand is known, production before prices are revealed, reservoir management before inflows are observed.

When the outcome space is not finite, the recourse is a function x2(⋅)x_2(\cdot)x2​(⋅), and the problem must specify the class of functions it ranges over. Rockafellar and Wets (Pacific J. Math. 62 (1976) 173–195) develop the duality theory of the convex case with recourse functions that are measurable and essentially bounded (L∞\mathcal L^\inftyL∞), the setting in which the dual multipliers and their interpretation as prices become available. Their §3 asks whether that restriction loses anything: whether minimizing over L∞\mathcal L^\inftyL∞ recourses gives the same first-stage problem as minimizing, scenario by scenario, the best attainable second-stage cost.

Setting

Let (S,Σ,σ)(S,\Sigma,\sigma)(S,Σ,σ) be a probability space. The data are closed convex nonempty sets C1⊆Rn1C_1\subseteq\mathbb R^{n_1}C1​⊆Rn1​, C2⊆Rn2C_2\subseteq\mathbb R^{n_2}C2​⊆Rn2​, finite convex functions f10,f1if_{10},f_{1i}f10​,f1i​ on Rn1\mathbb R^{n_1}Rn1​ (i=1,…,m1i=1,\dots,m_1i=1,…,m1​), and functions f20(s,x1,x2)f_{20}(s,x_1,x_2)f20​(s,x1​,x2​), f2i(s,x1,x2)f_{2i}(s,x_1,x_2)f2i​(s,x1​,x2​) (i=1,…,m2i=1,\dots,m_2i=1,…,m2​), finite and jointly convex in (x1,x2)(x_1,x_2)(x1​,x2​) for each sss, and measurable in sss for each (x1,x2)(x_1,x_2)(x1​,x2​), summable for i=0i=0i=0 and bounded for i≥1i\ge1i≥1. These are the paper's standing assumptions.

With X=Rn1×Ln2∞X=\mathbb R^{n_1}\times\mathcal L^\infty_{n_2}X=Rn1​×Ln2​∞​, the essential objective of the problem P\mathbf PP is

f(x1,x2)=F1(x1,0)+∫SF2(s,x1,x2(s),0) σ(ds),f(x_1,x_2)=F_1(x_1,0)+\int_S F_2\big(s,x_1,x_2(s),0\big)\,\sigma(ds),f(x1​,x2​)=F1​(x1​,0)+∫S​F2​(s,x1​,x2​(s),0)σ(ds),

where F1(x1,u1)=f10(x1)F_1(x_1,u_1)=f_{10}(x_1)F1​(x1​,u1​)=f10​(x1​) if x1∈C1x_1\in C_1x1​∈C1​ and f1i(x1)≤u1if_{1i}(x_1)\le u_{1i}f1i​(x1​)≤u1i​ for all iii, and +∞+\infty+∞ otherwise, and F2(s,x1,x2,u2)=f20(s,x1,x2)F_2(s,x_1,x_2,u_2)=f_{20}(s,x_1,x_2)F2​(s,x1​,x2​,u2​)=f20​(s,x1​,x2​) if x2∈C2x_2\in C_2x2​∈C2​ and f2i(s,x1,x2)≤u2if_{2i}(s,x_1,x_2)\le u_{2i}f2i​(s,x1​,x2​)≤u2i​ for all iii, and +∞+\infty+∞ otherwise. Integrals of extended-real functions follow the paper's convention (2.4): the ordinary integral (real or −∞-\infty−∞) when the integrand is majorized by a summable function, and +∞+\infty+∞ otherwise.

Two first-stage problems are compared:

  • the first-stage problem induced by P\mathbf PP minimizes J(x1)=inf⁡x2∈Ln2∞f(x1,x2)J(x_1)=\inf_{x_2\in\mathcal L^\infty_{n_2}}f(x_1,x_2)J(x1​)=infx2​∈Ln2​∞​​f(x1​,x2​);
  • the intrinsic first-stage problem Q\mathbf QQ minimizes j(x1)=F1(x1,0)+∫Sq(s,x1) σ(ds)j(x_1)=F_1(x_1,0)+\int_S q(s,x_1)\,\sigma(ds)j(x1​)=F1​(x1​,0)+∫S​q(s,x1​)σ(ds), where q(s,x1)=inf⁡x2∈Rn2F2(s,x1,x2,0)q(s,x_1)=\inf_{x_2\in\mathbb R^{n_2}}F_2(s,x_1,x_2,0)q(s,x1​)=infx2​∈Rn2​​F2​(s,x1​,x2​,0) is the optimal recourse cost in scenario sss.

The hypothesis of the general result uses ρ(s,x1)=inf⁡{∣x2∣∣F2(s,x1,x2,0)<+∞}\rho(s,x_1)=\inf\{|x_2|\mid F_2(s,x_1,x_2,0)<+\infty\}ρ(s,x1​)=inf{∣x2​∣∣F2​(s,x1​,x2​,0)<+∞}, the Euclidean distance from the origin to the feasible recourses (+∞+\infty+∞ if there are none), and calls x1x_1x1​ intrinsically feasible when j(x1)<+∞j(x_1)<+\inftyj(x1​)<+∞. A normal convex integrand hhh on S×RnS\times\mathbb R^nS×Rn is lower semicontinuous, convex and proper in zzz for each sss, with a measurability condition given by a sequence of measurable functions dense in each dom⁡h(s,⋅)\operatorname{dom}h(s,\cdot)domh(s,⋅).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (p. 187)

If C2C_2C2​ is bounded, then for every x1∈Rn1x_1\in\mathbb R^{n_1}x1​∈Rn1​

j(x1)=J(x1)=inf⁡x2∈Ln2∞f(x1,x2),inf⁡Q=inf⁡P,j(x_1)=J(x_1)=\inf_{x_2\in\mathcal L^\infty_{n_2}}f(x_1,x_2),\qquad \inf\mathbf Q=\inf\mathbf P,j(x1​)=J(x1​)=x2​∈Ln2​∞​inf​f(x1​,x2​),infQ=infP,

the two first-stage problems have the same minimizers, and the infimum over x2∈Ln2∞x_2\in\mathcal L^\infty_{n_2}x2​∈Ln2​∞​ is attained for each x1x_1x1​.

Theorem 1 (p. 186)

If ρ(⋅,x1)\rho(\cdot,x_1)ρ(⋅,x1​) is essentially bounded for every intrinsically feasible x1x_1x1​, then j(x1)=J(x1)j(x_1)=J(x_1)j(x1​)=J(x1​) for all x1x_1x1​, inf⁡Q=inf⁡P\inf\mathbf Q=\inf\mathbf PinfQ=infP, and the minimizers coincide. Boundedness of C2C_2C2​ is a special case of this hypothesis.

Milestones

  • (2.1): F(x,u)=F1(x1,u1)+∫SF2(s,x1,x2(s),u2(s)) σ(ds)F(x,u)=F_1(x_1,u_1)+\int_S F_2(s,x_1,x_2(s),u_2(s))\,\sigma(ds)F(x,u)=F1​(x1​,u1​)+∫S​F2​(s,x1​,x2​(s),u2​(s))σ(ds) (p. 180);
  • Proposition 1: for a normal convex integrand, inf⁡z∈Lnp∫Sh(s,z(s)) σ(ds)=∫Sinf⁡zh(s,z) σ(ds)\inf_{z\in\mathcal L^p_n}\int_S h(s,z(s))\,\sigma(ds)=\int_S\inf_z h(s,z)\,\sigma(ds)infz∈Lnp​​∫S​h(s,z(s))σ(ds)=∫S​infz​h(s,z)σ(ds) whenever the left side is not +∞+\infty+∞ (p. 181);
  • Proposition 2: F2F_2F2​ is a normal convex integrand (p. 182);
  • Proposition 4: q(⋅,x1)q(\cdot,x_1)q(⋅,x1​) is measurable (p. 185);
  • (3.5)–(3.6): j≤fj\le fj≤f, hence inf⁡Q≤inf⁡P\inf\mathbf Q\le\inf\mathbf PinfQ≤infP (p. 186);
  • the feasible-recourse multifunction (3.10) is measurable, ρ\rhoρ is measurable, and the nearest feasible point is a measurable selection (p. 187);
  • Theorem 1 (p. 186);
  • with C2C_2C2​ bounded, the argmin multifunction of F2(s,x1,⋅,0)F_2(s,x_1,\cdot,0)F2​(s,x1​,⋅,0) is nonempty, compact, measurable and has a measurable selection (p. 188).

The Corollary of Theorem 2 (p. 188), that x1x_1x1​ minimizes Q\mathbf QQ iff some (x1,x2)(x_1,x_2)(x1​,x2​) minimizes P\mathbf PP, is included as a further statement.

Significance

The theorem justifies the modelling choice behind the paper's duality theory: when the second-stage constraint set is bounded, restricting recourse to essentially bounded measurable functions changes neither the optimal value nor the optimal first-stage decisions, and an optimal recourse function exists for every first stage. The duality theory of the companion mission (Theorem 3 of the same paper) is developed in that L∞\mathcal L^\inftyL∞ setting, so the two results together describe the problem completely in the bounded case. Proposition 1, the interchange of infimum and integral for normal integrands, is a basic tool of stochastic programming and of the calculus of variations, used well beyond this paper.

The results are proved in the 1976 paper, relying on Rockafellar's earlier work on normal integrands and measurable selections. None of them has a machine-checked proof. Mathlib has the Lebesgue and Bochner integrals, Lp\mathcal L^pLp spaces and the measurable-selection prerequisites in partial form; it has no normal integrands, no extended-real integral convention of this kind, and no interchange theorem. A formal development produces those as reusable components.

Difficulty

The inequality j≤Jj\le Jj≤J is immediate. The reverse inequality requires, from the pointwise infima q(s,x1)q(s,x_1)q(s,x1​), a single recourse function x2(⋅)x_2(\cdot)x2​(⋅) that is measurable, essentially bounded and nearly optimal in almost every scenario. Choosing a near-minimizer separately for each sss gives no measurability at all: the content is a measurable choice, and that needs the normality of F2F_2F2​ and the measurability of the multifunctions of feasible and of optimal recourses. Essential boundedness is a second, independent obstacle: without a bound on ρ\rhoρ every feasible recourse may be unbounded, and the infimum over L∞\mathcal L^\inftyL∞ can then exceed jjj. Attainment in Theorem 2 needs, in addition, compactness of the argmin sets, which comes from the boundedness of C2C_2C2​ and lower semicontinuity.

Formalization scope

Rn\mathbb R^nRn is Fin n → ℝ; indices i=1,…,mi=1,\dots,mi=1,…,m are Fin m; Ln∞\mathcal L^\infty_nLn∞​ and Lnp\mathcal L^p_nLnp​ are Mathlib's Lp (Fin n → ℝ) p σ, so recourse functions are almost-everywhere classes and the second-stage constraints hold almost surely. σ\sigmaσ is a probability measure in every theorem. All extended-real quantities (FFF, F1F_1F1​, F2F_2F2​, fff, JJJ, qqq, jjj, ρ\rhoρ, inf⁡P\inf\mathbf PinfP, inf⁡Q\inf\mathbf QinfQ) take values in EReal, and every infimum is the complete-lattice infimum, so an empty infimum is +∞+\infty+∞. The integral convention (2.4) is the published definition DupacovaWets.Consistency.expect: +∞+\infty+∞ when the positive part has infinite integral (for a measurable function, exactly when it has no summable majorant), and otherwise the difference of the lower Lebesgue integrals of the positive and negative parts. ∣⋅∣|\cdot|∣⋅∣ in ρ\rhoρ is the Euclidean length, not the sup norm. "Gives the minimum" is "has value ≤\le≤ the value at every point". Measurability of a multifunction is the published definition DupacovaWets.Consistency.IsMeasurableMultifunction ({s∣Γ(s)∩K≠∅}\{s\mid\Gamma(s)\cap K\ne\emptyset\}{s∣Γ(s)∩K=∅} measurable for every closed KKK). The standing assumptions are fields of the structure Problem.

The integral of an extended-real function must not be replaced by a Bochner integral of its real part, which would turn ±∞\pm\infty±∞ values into 000 and make jjj meaningless; and the infima must not be real sInf, which returns 000 on unbounded sets.

Reusable beyond this mission: the notion of a normal convex integrand on a finite-dimensional space, and Proposition 1. Contributions of measurable-selection infrastructure (Kuratowski–Ryll-Nardzewski type theorems, measurability of distance functions of closed-valued multifunctions) are welcome as supporting lemmas. The mission "Stochastic Convex Programming: Basic Duality 1" formalizes the duality theorem of the same paper on the same model.

Selected references

  • R. T. Rockafellar and R. J.-B. Wets, Stochastic convex programming: basic duality, Pacific Journal of Mathematics 62(1) (1976) 173–195. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1976.62.173
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Measurable dependence of convex sets and functions on parameters, Journal of Mathematical Analysis and Applications 28 (1969) 4–25. https://doi.org/10.1016/0022-247X(69)90104-8
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Integrals which are convex functionals, Pacific Journal of Mathematics 24(3) (1968) 525–539. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1968.24.525
  • G. B. Dantzig, Linear programming under uncertainty, Management Science 1(3–4) (1955) 197–206. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.1.3-4.197
15 thms1 active userReviewed
Optimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Scenarios and Policy Aggregation in Optimization Under Uncertainty 2: A Limit of Locally Optimal Progressive Hedging Steps Is a Stationary Point of the Nonconvex ProblemResearch Paper

Motivation

Multistage decision problems under uncertainty are often modelled by a finite set of scenarios: each scenario sss fixes one possible future, and for it a deterministic problem can be solved. What makes the problem stochastic is the requirement that decisions may depend only on information available at the time they are taken. Rockafellar and Wets (WP-87-119, 1987; journal version Math. Oper. Res. 16 (1991) 119–147) proposed the progressive hedging algorithm, which solves the scenario problems separately with a penalty and a price term and blends their solutions step by step into a single policy that respects the information constraints. The method is a standard decomposition scheme of stochastic programming and is implemented in solver libraries such as PySP and mpi-sppy.

For convex problems the paper proves convergence through the theory of the proximal point algorithm. Many practical scenario models are not convex (integer-like penalties, nonconvex costs). For that case the paper proves one result, Theorem 6.1: the algorithm cannot be expected to find a global minimum, but whenever it converges, its limit is a stationary point. This mission formalizes that result.

Setting

Let SSS be a finite set of scenarios with probabilities ps>0p_s>0ps​>0, ∑sps=1\sum_s p_s=1∑s​ps​=1. A decision is a vector x=(x1,…,xT)∈Rnx=(x_1,\dots,x_T)\in\mathbb R^nx=(x1​,…,xT​)∈Rn, split into blocks xtx_txt​ taken at times t=1,…,Tt=1,\dots,Tt=1,…,T. For each scenario there is a scenario subproblem

(Ps)minimize fs(x) over x∈Cs⊆Rn.(P_s)\qquad\text{minimize } f_s(x)\ \text{over } x\in C_s\subseteq\mathbb R^n .(Ps​)minimize fs​(x) over x∈Cs​⊆Rn.

Throughout, every CsC_sCs​ is nonempty and closed, every fsf_sfs​ is locally Lipschitz, and the sets {x∈Cs∣fs(x)≤α}\{x\in C_s\mid f_s(x)\le\alpha\}{x∈Cs​∣fs​(x)≤α} are bounded.

A policy is a map X:S→RnX:S\to\mathbb R^nX:S→Rn. Policies form a space E\mathcal EE with inner product ⟨X,Y⟩=∑spsX(s)⋅Y(s)\langle X,Y\rangle=\sum_s p_s X(s)\cdot Y(s)⟨X,Y⟩=∑s​ps​X(s)⋅Y(s) and norm ∥X∥=⟨X,X⟩1/2\|X\|=\langle X,X\rangle^{1/2}∥X∥=⟨X,X⟩1/2. For each time ttt the scenarios are partitioned into bundles A∈AtA\in\mathcal A_tA∈At​ of scenarios indistinguishable at time ttt. A policy is implementable, X∈NX\in\mathcal NX∈N, when each XtX_tXt​ is constant on every bundle of At\mathcal A_tAt​; it is admissible, X∈CX\in\mathcal CX∈C, when X(s)∈CsX(s)\in C_sX(s)∈Cs​ for all sss. The aggregation operator JJJ replaces Xt(s)X_t(s)Xt​(s) by its conditional expectation over the bundle of sss; K=I−JK=I-JK=I−J, and M={W∣JW=0}=N⊥\mathcal M=\{W\mid JW=0\}=\mathcal N^\perpM={W∣JW=0}=N⊥. With F(X)=∑spsfs(X(s))F(X)=\sum_s p_s f_s(X(s))F(X)=∑s​ps​fs​(X(s)) the problem is

(P)minimize F(X) over X∈C∩N.(P)\qquad\text{minimize } F(X)\ \text{over } X\in\mathcal C\cap\mathcal N .(P)minimize F(X) over X∈C∩N.

Progressive hedging with parameter r>0r>0r>0 keeps Xν∈CX^\nu\in\mathcal CXν∈C and Wν∈MW^\nu\in\mathcal MWν∈M. It sets X^ν=JXν\hat X^\nu=JX^\nuX^ν=JXν, computes Xν+1(s)X^{\nu+1}(s)Xν+1(s) for every sss from

(Psν)minimize fs(x)+x⋅Wν(s)+12r∣x−X^ν(s)∣2 over x∈Cs,(P^\nu_s)\qquad\text{minimize } f_s(x)+x\cdot W^\nu(s)+\tfrac12 r|x-\hat X^\nu(s)|^2\ \text{over } x\in C_s ,(Psν​)minimize fs​(x)+x⋅Wν(s)+21​r∣x−X^ν(s)∣2 over x∈Cs​,

and updates Wν+1=Wν+rKXν+1W^{\nu+1}=W^\nu+rKX^{\nu+1}Wν+1=Wν+rKXν+1. In the nonconvex case, Xν+1(s)X^{\nu+1}(s)Xν+1(s) is only required to be δ\deltaδ-locally optimal: optimal among the points of CsC_sCs​ within Euclidean distance δ\deltaδ of it, for a fixed δ>0\delta>0δ>0.

∂g(x)\partial g(x)∂g(x) denotes Clarke's generalized gradient of a locally Lipschitz ggg and NC(x)N_C(x)NC​(x) Clarke's normal cone to a closed set CCC.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6.1

If Xν→X∗X^\nu\to X^*Xν→X∗ and Wν→W∗W^\nu\to W^*Wν→W∗, then X∗∈N∩CX^*\in\mathcal N\cap\mathcal CX∗∈N∩C, W∗∈MW^*\in\mathcal MW∗∈M and

−W∗(s)∈∂fs(X∗(s))+NCs(X∗(s))for all s∈S;-W^*(s)\in\partial f_s(X^*(s))+N_{C_s}(X^*(s))\qquad\text{for all } s\in S;−W∗(s)∈∂fs​(X∗(s))+NCs​​(X∗(s))for all s∈S;

moreover X∗X^*X∗ is a local minimizer of (P~)(\tilde P)(P~), which is (P) with fsf_sfs​ replaced by f~s(x)=fs(x)+12r∣x−X∗(s)∣2\tilde f_s(x)=f_s(x)+\tfrac12 r|x-X^*(s)|^2f~​s​(x)=fs​(x)+21​r∣x−X∗(s)∣2, and −W∗(s)∈∂f~s(X∗(s))+NCs(X∗(s))-W^*(s)\in\partial\tilde f_s(X^*(s))+N_{C_s}(X^*(s))−W∗(s)∈∂f~​s​(X∗(s))+NCs​​(X∗(s)).

Milestones

  1. (6.4)–(6.5): each Xν+1X^{\nu+1}Xν+1 is optimal for (Pν)(P^\nu)(Pν), minimize F(X)+⟨X,Wν⟩+12r∥X−X^ν∥2F(X)+\langle X,W^\nu\rangle+\tfrac12 r\|X-\hat X^\nu\|^2F(X)+⟨X,Wν⟩+21​r∥X−X^ν∥2 over C\mathcal CC, on the ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥-ball of radius δ′=δmin⁡sps1/2\delta'=\delta\min_s p_s^{1/2}δ′=δmins​ps1/2​.
  2. W∗∈MW^*\in\mathcal MW∗∈M, KXν→0KX^\nu\to0KXν→0 and X∗∈NX^*\in\mathcal NX∗∈N.
  3. (6.6): X∗X^*X∗ is locally optimal for (P∗)(P^*)(P∗), minimize F(X)+⟨X,W∗⟩+12r∥X−X∗∥2F(X)+\langle X,W^*\rangle+\tfrac12 r\|X-X^*\|^2F(X)+⟨X,W∗⟩+21​r∥X−X∗∥2 over C\mathcal CC.
  4. X∗X^*X∗ is locally optimal for F(X)+12r∥X−X∗∥2=E{f~s(X(s))}F(X)+\tfrac12 r\|X-X^*\|^2=E\{\tilde f_s(X(s))\}F(X)+21​r∥X−X∗∥2=E{f~​s​(X(s))} over C∩N\mathcal C\cap\mathcal NC∩N.
  5. (6.2): ∂f~s(X∗(s))=∂fs(X∗(s))\partial\tilde f_s(X^*(s))=\partial f_s(X^*(s))∂f~​s​(X∗(s))=∂fs​(X∗(s)), from ∂f~s(x)=∂fs(x)+r(x−X∗(s))\partial\tilde f_s(x)=\partial f_s(x)+r(x-X^*(s))∂f~​s​(x)=∂fs​(x)+r(x−X∗(s)).
  6. Theorem 4.1: at a local minimizer of (P) satisfying the constraint qualification "the only W∈MW\in\mathcal MW∈M with −W(s)∈NCs(X∗(s))-W(s)\in N_{C_s}(X^*(s))−W(s)∈NCs​​(X∗(s)) for all sss is W=0W=0W=0", some W∗∈MW^*\in\mathcal MW∗∈M satisfies the conditions above; in the convex case these conditions imply global optimality.

Significance

Theorem 6.1 is the paper's only guarantee outside convexity. It says that progressive hedging, run with local solvers on nonconvex scenario subproblems, cannot converge to a point that fails the first-order conditions, and that the limiting price system W∗W^*W∗ is a Lagrange multiplier for the nonanticipativity constraint X∈NX\in\mathcal NX∈N. It needs no constraint qualification, unlike the general necessary condition of Theorem 4.1: the multiplier is produced by the algorithm. This is the basis for using progressive hedging as a heuristic for nonconvex and mixed-integer stochastic programs.

The result is proved in the paper; to our knowledge it has not been machine-checked. A complete formalization would give checked statements of the scenario model (JJJ, KKK, N\mathcal NN, M\mathcal MM with the weighted inner product), of the algorithm with inexact local subproblem solutions, and of Clarke's optimality conditions for problems with separable structure. The convex convergence theory of the same paper is the subject of the companion mission Scenarios and Policy Aggregation in Optimization Under Uncertainty 1.

Difficulty

The local optimality of Xν+1(s)X^{\nu+1}(s)Xν+1(s) is relative to a ball centred at the iterate, which moves. Passing to the limit requires a radius that is uniform in ν\nuν and in the norm of E\mathcal EE; this is what δ′\delta'δ′ provides, and it only covers points strictly inside the limiting ball: a point of C\mathcal CC at distance exactly δ′\delta'δ′ from X∗X^*X∗ may lie outside every ball around the iterates. The step from local optimality to the multiplier condition uses Clarke's necessary condition for minimization over a closed set and the sum rule for a Lipschitz function plus a smooth one; neither is in Mathlib. Theorem 4.1 needs, in addition, a calculus rule for normal cones of an intersection under a qualification condition, and the transfer of Clarke's objects between E\mathcal EE with the weighted inner product and the individual scenario spaces.

Formalization scope

Rn\mathbb R^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n). A policy is a function S → EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n). The weighted inner product and norm of E\mathcal EE are explicit definitions (ip, pnorm); Lean's built-in norm on policies (the sup norm) is used only for topological notions: convergence of the iterates and "locally optimal" without a radius, which do not depend on the norm. The radii δ′\delta'δ′ are in the weighted norm, the radius δ\deltaδ in the Euclidean norm of Rn\mathbb R^nRn. Time blocks are a monotone map from coordinates to periods; bundles are the classes of a setoid on SSS for each period. The standing assumptions are fields of the model structure, so every theorem carries them. Indices are 0-based and sequences are indexed by ν=0,1,2,…\nu=0,1,2,\dotsν=0,1,2,…; the run starts from X0∈CX^0\in\mathcal CX0∈C and W0∈MW^0\in\mathcal MW0∈M. Theorem 4.1 is stated in its decomposed form (4.4), scenario by scenario.

Clarke's generalized gradient and normal cone are the published platform definitions ClarkeGradients.Shared.generalizedGradient (convex hull of limits of gradients) and ClarkeGradients.FlowInvariance.normalCone (closure of the cone generated by the generalized gradient of the distance function); for locally Lipschitz functions and closed nonempty sets these are the objects the paper uses.

Formalizations that trivialize the statement are excluded: Theorem 6.1 carries no convexity hypothesis and no constraint qualification, the δ′\delta'δ′-balls are not measured in the sup norm, and the run predicate is satisfiable (the model files come with a sanity check exhibiting a run).

Useful infrastructure, reusable beyond this mission: Clarke's necessary condition for local minimization of a Lipschitz function over a closed set, the sum rule with a C1C^1C1 function, products of normal cones, and basic facts about JJJ (an orthogonal projection onto N\mathcal NN for the weighted inner product). Contributions of any of these are welcome.

Selected references

  • R. T. Rockafellar and R. J.-B. Wets, Scenarios and policy aggregation in optimization under uncertainty, IIASA Working Paper WP-87-119, 1987. https://pure.iiasa.ac.at/id/eprint/2933/
  • R. T. Rockafellar and R. J.-B. Wets, Scenarios and policy aggregation in optimization under uncertainty, Mathematics of Operations Research 16(1), 119–147, 1991. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.16.1.119
  • F. H. Clarke, Generalized gradients and applications, Transactions of the AMS 205, 247–262, 1975. https://doi.org/10.1090/S0002-9947-1975-0367131-6
  • F. H. Clarke, Optimization and Nonsmooth Analysis, Wiley, 1983. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611971309
11 thms1 active userReviewed
ProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Stochastic Inequalities on Partially Ordered Spaces 3: Ornstein's d̄-Distance of Stationary Real Processes Equals ∫ω⁰dP + ∫ω⁰dQ − 2 sup{∫ω⁰dR : R ≺ P, R ≺ Q}Research Paper

Motivation

Two stationary random sequences can have identical distributions at each individual time while differing in their dependence across time. Comparing only their one-time marginals therefore misses a feature relevant to stochastic-process comparison. Ornstein's dˉ\bar ddˉ measures the cost of matching two whole stationary processes: it minimizes the expected discrepancy at one time over joint laws that are themselves stationary. Kamae, Krengel, and O'Brien use stochastic order to replace that optimization over pairs of processes with an optimization over a single common lower process in Theorem 8 of their 1977 paper. This mission formalizes that identity and the stationary coupling results supporting it.

Setting

A two-sided path with values in a space EEE is a sequence ω=(ωn)n∈Z\omega=(\omega^n)_{n\in\mathbb Z}ω=(ωn)n∈Z​. The shift TTT sends ω\omegaω to the path whose coordinate nnn is ωn+1\omega^{n+1}ωn+1. A probability law PPP on paths is stationary, written P∈STP\in\mathcal S_TP∈ST​, when P∘T−1=PP\circ T^{-1}=PP∘T−1=P. A law ν\nuν on pairs of paths is jointly stationary, written ν∈SS\nu\in\mathcal S_Sν∈SS​, when it is invariant under S(ω1,ω2)=(Tω1,Tω2)S(\omega_1,\omega_2)=(T\omega_1,T\omega_2)S(ω1​,ω2​)=(Tω1​,Tω2​). Its first and second marginals are denoted ν1\nu_1ν1​ and ν2\nu_2ν2​. These are the objects defined at the start of Section 8.

When EEE has a partial order, paths are ordered coordinatewise: ω1≤ω2\omega_1\leq\omega_2ω1​≤ω2​ means ω1n≤ω2n\omega_1^n\leq\omega_2^nω1n​≤ω2n​ for every integer nnn. For probability laws on any such space, write P≺QP\prec QP≺Q if ∫f dP≤∫f dQ\int f\,dP\leq\int f\,dQ∫fdP≤∫fdQ for every bounded, measurable, increasing real function fff. Thus stochastic order compares laws through all bounded increasing observations, including observations that depend on several time coordinates. The paper introduces this order on a partially ordered Polish space whose order graph is closed and whose measurable sets are Borel sets in Section 1.

For real-valued paths, ω0\omega^0ω0 is the value at time zero. If the time-zero values under stationary laws PPP and QQQ are integrable, define Ornstein's distance by

dˉ(P,Q)=inf⁡ν∈SSν1=P,ν2=Q∫∣ω10−ω20∣ ν(dω1,dω2).\bar d(P,Q)=\inf_{\substack{\nu\in\mathcal S_S\\\nu_1=P,\,\nu_2=Q}} \int |\omega_1^0-\omega_2^0|\,\nu(d\omega_1,d\omega_2).dˉ(P,Q)=ν∈SS​ν1​=P,ν2​=Q​inf​∫∣ω10​−ω20​∣ν(dω1​,dω2​).

The stationary constraint on ν\nuν is part of the definition. It asks for a matching of the full processes, even though the cost is evaluated at one coordinate. The paper notes that this formula is equivalent to Ornstein's original definition for the processes considered here on p. 910.

Formalization targets

The ordered special case is Lemma 3: if P≺QP\prec QP≺Q, then

dˉ(P,Q)=∫ω0 Q(dω)−∫ω0 P(dω).\bar d(P,Q)=\int\omega^0\,Q(d\omega)-\int\omega^0\,P(d\omega).dˉ(P,Q)=∫ω0Q(dω)−∫ω0P(dω).

The main target is Theorem 8, equation (18). For stationary real process laws P,QP,QP,Q with finite first moments at time zero,

dˉ(P,Q)=∫ω0 P(dω)+∫ω0 Q(dω)−2sup⁡R∈STR≺P,R≺Q∫ω0 R(dω).\bar d(P,Q)= \int\omega^0\,P(d\omega)+\int\omega^0\,Q(d\omega) -2\sup_{\substack{R\in\mathcal S_T\\R\prec P,\,R\prec Q}} \int\omega^0\,R(d\omega).dˉ(P,Q)=∫ω0P(dω)+∫ω0Q(dω)−2R∈ST​R≺P,R≺Q​sup​∫ω0R(dω).

The supremum ranges over stationary laws of whole paths, ordered on the full coordinatewise path space. The milestone list includes Theorem 7's stationary monotone coupling, Lemmas 2 and 3, and three claims made inside the proof of Theorem 8: the triangle inequality dˉ(P,Q)≤dˉ(P,R)+dˉ(R,Q)\bar d(P,Q)\le\bar d(P,R)+\bar d(R,Q)dˉ(P,Q)≤dˉ(P,R)+dˉ(R,Q), which the paper asserts without proof ("since dˉ\bar ddˉ is a distance"), the attainment of the infimum defining dˉ\bar ddˉ, and the fact that the law of the coordinatewise minimum of an optimal stationary coupling lies below both PPP and QQQ. These are the statements from the paper that delimit the target.

Significance

The identity expresses a distance defined through stationary joint distributions using only stationary laws below both inputs in stochastic order. It therefore links a coupling cost to an order-theoretic optimization. In the ordered case, Lemma 3 evaluates the distance directly from the difference of means. The authors point out that the general formula replaces an infimum over laws on a product path space by a supremum over laws on one path space on p. 911.

The 1977 results are proved on paper; these mission statements are open Lean proof targets. A completed formalization would supply reusable definitions for stationary path laws, stationary couplings, stochastic order on path spaces, and dˉ\bar ddˉ, together with checked statements about their interaction. It would also make the closed-order and first-moment conditions explicit at every point where a subsequent result uses them. The separate mission for Theorem 1 contains the general coupling characterization that the paper invokes in Theorem 7.

Difficulty

The cost in dˉ\bar ddˉ inspects only time zero, but admissibility of a coupling involves every time coordinate at once. An arbitrary coupling of the time-zero marginals need not extend to a stationary coupling of the two processes. The stationary-coupling existence statement must preserve both full path marginals and the coordinatewise order. On the optimization side, taking an infimum in the real numbers is justified only after the coupling class is shown nonempty and its costs are finite; attaining the infimum requires more than those two facts. These are the obstacles made explicit by Theorem 7 and the proof of Theorem 8.

Formalization scope

The Lean path space is Z→E\mathbb Z\to EZ→E, with Mathlib's product topology, Borel measurable structure, and coordinatewise order. The shift sends coordinate nnn to the old coordinate n+1n+1n+1. For Theorem 7, EEE carries the paper's standing assumptions: it is Polish, its order is a closed partial order, and its measurable structure is Borel. Measurability of quantified functions is explicit, following the paper's convention that sets and functions under discussion are measurable. Theorem 8 and its Section 8 milestones specialize to E=RE=\mathbb RE=R.

The real-valued definition of dˉ\bar ddˉ takes the infimum over jointly stationary probability couplings with the specified full path marginals. Under the target's finite-first-moment hypotheses, the product coupling makes this class nonempty, every displayed cost is integrable, and costs are bounded below by zero. The goal states the supremum with an explicit finite least upper bound. It considers common lower laws with an integrable time-zero coordinate: such laws give the finite values intended by the paper, and this restriction does not remove the optimal value. These choices exclude totalized integrals and default real infima or suprema from supplying a spurious identity. Theorem 7's support condition is concentration on the closed set of ordered path pairs.

Reusable contributions include general facts about stationary measures on countable products, measurable coordinatewise order and meet maps, and stationary coupling compactness. The target specifically requires the order to test bounded increasing functions on the full path space; replacing it with a comparison of time-zero marginals would give a different claim. Likewise, dropping the joint stationarity constraint from the definition of dˉ\bar ddˉ would turn it into the Kantorovich (Wasserstein-1) distance of the time-zero marginals, a different and in general smaller quantity; the formalization keeps that constraint. The source is the published Annals of Probability version; throughout this mission printed page === PDF page +898+898+898.

Selected references

  • T. Kamae, U. Krengel, and G. L. O'Brien, Stochastic Inequalities on Partially Ordered Spaces, The Annals of Probability 5(6), 899–912, 1977. DOI: 10.1214/aop/1176995659.
13 thms1 active userReviewed
Control TheoryStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Distributed Scheduling Based on Due Dates and Buffer Priorities 2: Under Last Buffer First Serve the Number of Parts Stays Bounded, Eventually by (λc(ε)+γ)/(1−ρ−λε)Research Paper

Motivation

Semiconductor wafer fabrication lines are reentrant: a wafer returns to the same photolithography or etching station many times along its route, so the parts competing for a machine are at different stages of completion. In such a line, a local dispatching rule decides at every machine which waiting part goes next, and the question is whether a given rule keeps the line stable whenever there is enough capacity. Lu and Kumar (IEEE TAC 36(12), 1991) showed that the answer depends on the rule. Some natural buffer priority rules make the line unstable even when every machine has spare capacity (their Example 1; see also Kumar and Seidman 1990). Two rules are proved stable for every route: first buffer first serve (FBFS) and last buffer first serve (LBFS).

LBFS serves at each machine the waiting part that is closest to completion. It is the "pull" rule of the two, and the one closer to practice: it minimizes work in progress in many settings and coincides with earliest due date when parts arrive in due-date order. This mission formalizes the paper's LBFS results, §V. The sibling mission (FBFS, §IV) treats the other policy on the same model.

Timeline:

  • 1990: Kumar and Seidman exhibit instability of clearing policies on a reentrant line with spare capacity.
  • 1991: Lu and Kumar prove stability of FBFS (Theorem 1) and of LBFS (Theorems 2–3) under deterministic bursty arrivals. They also prove it for least slack and earliest due date (Theorem 4, Corollary 1), and show that a buffer priority policy can be unstable (Example 1).
  • 1996: Dai and Weiss prove stability of the fluid models of FBFS and LBFS on reentrant lines (Math. Oper. Res. 21(1)), which by Dai's fluid limit theorem gives positive Harris recurrence for the stochastic versions.

Setting

A nonacyclic flow line has SSS service centers; center σ\sigmaσ has mσ≥1m_\sigma \ge 1mσ​≥1 identical machines, each processing one part at a time. Every part follows the same route through buffers b1,…,blb_1, \dots, b_lb1​,…,bl​: in buffer bib_ibi​ it waits at center σi\sigma_iσi​, then needs τi>0\tau_i > 0τi​>0 units of uninterrupted processing on one machine of that center. A center may serve several buffers.

Parts are released into b1b_1b1​; part π\piπ is released at time α(π)\alpha(\pi)α(π) and exits at time e(π)e(\pi)e(π), when its service at blb_lbl​ ends. Finitely many parts may be present at time 000, in any buffer, some already in service. With u(t)u(t)u(t) the number of releases in [0,t][0,t][0,t], the arrivals are bursty with rate λ\lambdaλ and burst γ\gammaγ if

u(t)−u(s)≤λ(t−s)+γ(0≤s≤t).(1)u(t)-u(s)\le \lambda(t-s)+\gamma\qquad(0\le s\le t).\tag{1}u(t)−u(s)≤λ(t−s)+γ(0≤s≤t).(1)

The work per machine that one part brings to center σ\sigmaσ is wσ=∑i:σi=στi/mσw_\sigma=\sum_{i:\sigma_i=\sigma}\tau_i/m_\sigmawσ​=∑i:σi​=σ​τi​/mσ​, and the load is ρ=λw‾\rho=\lambda\overline wρ=λw with w‾=max⁡σwσ\overline w=\max_\sigma w_\sigmaw=maxσ​wσ​. The capacity condition is ρ<1\rho<1ρ<1 (3). Also τ‾=max⁡jτj\overline\tau=\max_j\tau_jτ=maxj​τj​, and w(k)w^{(k)}w(k) is the maximum per-machine work brought to a center by a part in bkb_kbk​, counting only buffers bk,…,blb_k,\dots,b_lbk​,…,bl​ (6).

Scheduling is nonidling (a machine idles only if every buffer of its center is empty) and nonpreemptive, and a machine takes the part at the head of a buffer. Under LBFS, a machine takes a part from bib_ibi​ only if every buffer bjb_jbj​ of its center with j>ij>ij>i is empty. The number of parts in the system at time ttt is x(t)x(t)x(t).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3, Stability of LBFS

Under (1) and (3), for every ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 with 1−ρ−λε>01-\rho-\lambda\varepsilon>01−ρ−λε>0,

x(t)≤max⁡{(1+ρ+λε)x(0)+λc(ε)+γ, 2(λc(ε)+γ)1−ρ−λε}(t≥0),x(t)\le\max\Big\{(1+\rho+\lambda\varepsilon)x(0)+\lambda c(\varepsilon)+\gamma,\ \frac{2(\lambda c(\varepsilon)+\gamma)}{1-\rho-\lambda\varepsilon}\Big\}\quad(t\ge0),x(t)≤max{(1+ρ+λε)x(0)+λc(ε)+γ, 1−ρ−λε2(λc(ε)+γ)​}(t≥0), lim sup⁡t→∞x(t)≤λc(ε)+γ1−ρ−λε.\limsup_{t\to\infty}x(t)\le\frac{\lambda c(\varepsilon)+\gamma}{1-\rho-\lambda\varepsilon}.t→∞limsup​x(t)≤1−ρ−λελc(ε)+γ​.

Here c(ε)c(\varepsilon)c(ε) is the explicit constant of the delay estimate. The paper prints the second bound as λc(ε)+γ/(1−ρ−λε)\lambda c(\varepsilon)+\gamma/(1-\rho-\lambda\varepsilon)λc(ε)+γ/(1−ρ−λε); its proof establishes the form above, which is the one posed.

Milestones

The delay estimate behind the goal, in the order of its proof:

  • the base case (8) for the last buffer;
  • the one-step comparison (11) with the part just ahead;
  • the induction claim (10) for every truncated line B(k)={bk,…,bl}B^{(k)}=\{b_k,\dots,b_l\}B(k)={bk​,…,bl​}: a part in B(k)B^{(k)}B(k) with xxx parts ahead exits within c(k)(ε)+(w(k)+ε)xc^{(k)}(\varepsilon)+(w^{(k)}+\varepsilon)xc(k)(ε)+(w(k)+ε)x;
  • Theorem 2, the contractive estimate
e(π)−α(π)≤c(ε)+(w‾+ε)x(ε>0),e(\pi)-\alpha(\pi)\le c(\varepsilon)+(\overline w+\varepsilon)x\qquad(\varepsilon>0),e(π)−α(π)≤c(ε)+(w+ε)x(ε>0),

for a part that finds xxx parts in the system on release.

Then the Pipeline Property e(π)−α(π)≤w‾x+o(x)e(\pi)-\alpha(\pi)\le\overline wx+o(x)e(π)−α(π)≤wx+o(x), order preservation (parts exit in the order they enter), and the recursion (14) for the number in system along successive exit times. A further item states that LBFS is stable in the sense of §II: every delay e(π)−α(π)e(\pi)-\alpha(\pi)e(π)−α(π) is bounded.

Significance

Theorem 2 says the delay of a part under LBFS grows with the number of parts ahead at rate w‾+ε\overline w+\varepsilonw+ε: the line behaves like a pipeline whose speed is set by its bottleneck center, although parts revisit centers. Theorem 3 converts this into a bound on work in progress that holds for all time, with an asymptotic bound that does not depend on the initial state. Together they give stability of LBFS for every route and every burst size, with explicit constants. This is a deterministic, sample-path result: no distributional assumption on arrivals is needed. Its constants are explicit, so they can be evaluated for a given line.

The results are proved in the paper; none is formalized. The mission produces a machine-checked model of a multi-server reentrant line with nonidling, nonpreemptive, head-of-buffer buffer-priority dispatch, together with Theorems 2 and 3 on it. The model carries over to the other policies of the paper (FBFS, least slack, earliest due date).

Difficulty

The obvious argument fails because under LBFS parts released later do interfere with a part π\piπ: they occupy machines nonpreemptively at the low-priority buffers π\piπ must still pass. So the delay of π\piπ cannot be bounded by the work ahead of it alone. The paper's estimate is an induction from the end of the line backwards over the truncated systems B(k)B^{(k)}B(k), nested with an induction on the position of π\piπ in its buffer. The constant c(k)(ε)c^{(k)}(\varepsilon)c(k)(ε) is recomputed at every level from c(k+1)(ε/2)c^{(k+1)}(\varepsilon/2)c(k+1)(ε/2), so ε\varepsilonε is halved at each level. A formal proof must also handle what the paper treats informally:

  • the order in which parts leave buffers when several arrive at the same instant;
  • parts already in service at time 000;
  • an empty system between busy periods.

Formalization scope

All declarations are in the namespace ReentrantScheduling.LBFS.

  • Buffers are 0-based in Lean: the paper's bib_ibi​ is index i−1i-1i−1.
  • A run lists its parts in a fixed line order: parts present at time 000 first (deeper buffers first, then earlier service start), then released parts by release time. This order breaks ties between simultaneous arrivals, and "parts ahead of π\piπ" means the parts in the system that precede π\piπ in it.
  • Service start times are in WithTop ℝ, with ⊤ meaning never, so a run need not serve every part, and the theorems assert that parts are served. A formalization with real-valued start times would assume every part is served, which is half of what stability asserts.
  • All counts (capacity, nonidling, (1), x(t)x(t)x(t)) are Set.encard, never Set.ncard, which would count an infinite set as 000 and make the capacity rule vacuous.
  • The constants c(k)(ε)c^{(k)}(\varepsilon)c(k)(ε) of (8)–(9) are explicit definitions that depend only on the line and ε\varepsilonε. A constant chosen after the run would let it depend on the arrivals or the initial state.
  • Theorem 3's bounds are inequalities in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]; the lim sup is taken there, so it cannot be a junk value of an unbounded real function.
  • The standing assumptions of §II are hypotheses or part of the run predicate: nonidling, nonpreemptive, head-of-buffer service, mσ≥1m_\sigma\ge1mσ​≥1, l≥1l\ge1l≥1. The positivity τi>0\tau_i>0τi​>0 is pinned: the paper leaves it implicit.
  • Every theorem quantifies over all admissible LBFS runs. The empty run and nontrivial runs satisfy the hypotheses.

The model is reusable for other dispatch rules on reentrant lines. Proofs of any milestone are welcome, as are lemmas on admissible runs (FIFO within buffers, finiteness of x(t)x(t)x(t)).

Not posed here:

  • Example 1, which is already on the platform as QueueingStability.LuKumar.theorem31;
  • Theorem 4 and Corollary 1 (least slack, earliest due date), whose proof modifications the paper leaves to the reader;
  • Theorem 5 (several flow lines), whose proof is a sketch.

Selected references

  • S. H. Lu and P. R. Kumar, Distributed Scheduling Based on Due Dates and Buffer Priorities, IEEE Transactions on Automatic Control 36(12), 1406–1416, 1991. https://doi.org/10.1109/9.106156
  • P. R. Kumar and T. I. Seidman, Dynamic Instabilities and Stabilization Methods in Distributed Real-Time Scheduling of Manufacturing Systems, IEEE Transactions on Automatic Control 35(3), 289–298, 1990. https://doi.org/10.1109/9.50339
  • J. G. Dai and G. Weiss, Stability and Instability of Fluid Models for Reentrant Lines, Mathematics of Operations Research 21(1), 115–134, 1996. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.21.1.115
10 thms1 active userReviewed
Control TheoryStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Distributed Scheduling Based on Due Dates and Buffer Priorities 1: First Buffer First Serve Is Stable on Every Nonacyclic Flow Line Whose Bursty Arrival Rate Is Below CapacityResearch Paper

Motivation

Semiconductor wafer fabs are the standard example of a reentrant manufacturing line: a wafer visits the same lithography or etching station many times along a route of hundreds of steps, so each station holds parts at many different stages of completion and must decide, every time a machine frees up, which of them to serve next. Kumar (Re-entrant lines, Queueing Systems 13, 1993) singled these lines out as a third class of manufacturing systems besides flow shops and job shops, and stability of their scheduling policies became a central question in the analysis of queueing networks.

The question is sharp because the obvious conjecture is false. Kumar and Seidman (IEEE TAC 35(3), 1990) gave a deterministic network in which a distributed policy is unstable although every machine has spare capacity, and Lu and Kumar (IEEE TAC 36(12), 1991, Example 1, p. 1409) gave a two-station reentrant line in which a buffer priority policy is unstable at load below one. Their paper then identifies policies that are always stable: first buffer first serve (FBFS, Theorem 1), last buffer first serve (Theorem 3) and the due-date policies least slack and earliest due date (Theorem 4). This mission formalizes Theorem 1.

Timeline:

  • 1990: Kumar and Seidman exhibit instability of clear-a-fraction policies under load below one.
  • 1991: Lu and Kumar prove FBFS and LBFS stable on every nonacyclic flow line with deterministic bursty arrivals, and exhibit an unstable buffer priority policy.
  • 1995–1996: Dai (Ann. Appl. Probab. 5(1), 1995) reduces positive Harris recurrence of multiclass networks to stability of fluid models; Dai and Weiss (Math. Oper. Res. 21(1), 1996) prove the FBFS and LBFS fluid models of reentrant lines stable.

Setting

A nonacyclic flow line has SSS service centers; center σ\sigmaσ has mσ≥1m_\sigma\ge1mσ​≥1 identical machines in parallel, each working on one part at a time. Every part follows the same route: it visits buffers b1,b2,…,blb_1,b_2,\dots,b_lb1​,b2​,…,bl​ in order, buffer bib_ibi​ sits at center σi\sigma_iσi​, and a part in bib_ibi​ needs τi>0\tau_i>0τi​>0 time units of uninterrupted processing on one machine of σi\sigma_iσi​. The same center may appear many times along the route.

Parts enter at b1b_1b1​; part π\piπ is released at time α(π)\alpha(\pi)α(π). The releases are deterministic but may be bursty: with u(t)u(t)u(t) the number of parts released in [0,t][0,t][0,t],

u(t)−u(s)≤λ(t−s)+γfor all 0≤s≤t,(1)u(t)-u(s)\le\lambda(t-s)+\gamma\qquad\text{for all }0\le s\le t,\tag{1}u(t)−u(s)≤λ(t−s)+γfor all 0≤s≤t,(1)

for constants λ,γ≥0\lambda,\gamma\ge0λ,γ≥0. Each part brings wσ=∑i:σi=στi/mσw_\sigma=\sum_{i:\sigma_i=\sigma}\tau_i/m_\sigmawσ​=∑i:σi​=σ​τi​/mσ​ units of work per machine to center σ\sigmaσ, and the load is ρ=max⁡σλwσ\rho=\max_\sigma\lambda w_\sigmaρ=maxσ​λwσ​. The arrival rate is within capacity when ρ<1\rho<1ρ<1 (3). At time 000 the line may hold finitely many initial parts in arbitrary buffers, some of them already in service.

A schedule is nonidling (a machine idles only if every buffer of its center is empty), nonpreemptive (a started service runs to completion) and serves the part at the head of the chosen buffer. Under FBFS a free machine at center σ\sigmaσ takes a part from bib_ibi​ only if every buffer bjb_jbj​ of σ\sigmaσ with j<ij<ij<i is empty. With e(π)e(\pi)e(π) the time part π\piπ exits after its service at blb_lbl​, the schedule is stable if there is Γ≥0\Gamma\ge0Γ≥0 with

e(π)−α(π)≤Γfor all parts π.(4)e(\pi)-\alpha(\pi)\le\Gamma\qquad\text{for all parts }\pi.\tag{4}e(π)−α(π)≤Γfor all parts π.(4)

Γ\GammaΓ may depend on the initial state as well as on λ\lambdaλ.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1 (p. 1409)

For every line, every λ,γ≥0\lambda,\gamma\ge0λ,γ≥0 with ρ<1\rho<1ρ<1, and every admissible FBFS run whose releases satisfy (1),

∃ Γ≥0  ∀π:e(π)≤α(π)+Γ.\exists\,\Gamma\ge0\ \ \forall\pi:\quad e(\pi)\le\alpha(\pi)+\Gamma .∃Γ≥0  ∀π:e(π)≤α(π)+Γ.

The statement fixes no constant: Γ\GammaΓ is chosen after the run.

Milestones (proof of Theorem 1, pp. 1409–1410)

An interval [T1,T2][T_1,T_2][T1​,T2​] is an iii-busy period if at every instant some part waits in a buffer bjb_jbj​, j≤ij\le ij≤i, at center σi\sigma_iσi​. With τˉ=max⁡jτj\bar\tau=\max_j\tau_jτˉ=maxj​τj​, Γˉi=∑j<i(Γ(j)+τj)\bar\Gamma_i=\sum_{j<i}(\Gamma^{(j)}+\tau_j)Γˉi​=∑j<i​(Γ(j)+τj​) and

Γ(i)=[2τˉ+∑σj=σi, j≤iλτjΓˉi+γτjmσi][1−∑σj=σi, j≤iλτjmσi]−1,\Gamma^{(i)}=\Big[2\bar\tau+\sum_{\sigma_j=\sigma_i,\,j\le i}\frac{\lambda\tau_j\bar\Gamma_i+\gamma\tau_j}{m_{\sigma_i}}\Big]\Big[1-\sum_{\sigma_j=\sigma_i,\,j\le i}\frac{\lambda\tau_j}{m_{\sigma_i}}\Big]^{-1},Γ(i)=[2τˉ+σj​=σi​,j≤i∑​mσi​​λτj​Γˉi​+γτj​​][1−σj​=σi​,j≤i∑​mσi​​λτj​​]−1,
  1. a 1-busy period commencing at T1>0T_1>0T1​>0 has T2−T1≤Γ(1)T_2-T_1\le\Gamma^{(1)}T2​−T1​≤Γ(1);
  2. there are finite times T(i)T^{(i)}T(i) after which every iii-busy period has length at most Γ(i)\Gamma^{(i)}Γ(i);
  3. a part arriving at bjb_jbj​ after T(j)T^{(j)}T(j) leaves bjb_jbj​ within Γ(j)+τj\Gamma^{(j)}+\tau_jΓ(j)+τj​;
  4. a part released after T(l)T^{(l)}T(l) has delay at most ∑j=1l(Γ(j)+τj)\sum_{j=1}^l(\Gamma^{(j)}+\tau_j)∑j=1l​(Γ(j)+τj​).

Milestone 4 has an explicit bound independent of the initial state; the goal additionally covers the finitely many parts present or released during the transient.

Significance

Theorem 1 says that the simplest "push" discipline, always serving the earliest stage first, keeps every part's delay bounded on every reentrant line whose stations have spare capacity, for every initial state and every bursty but rate-limited release pattern. By Little's law it also bounds the work in process. Together with Example 1 it shows that stability is a property of the policy, not of the load condition alone, and it gave one of the first two positive results for a whole class of reentrant lines. The explicit constants Γ(i)\Gamma^{(i)}Γ(i) make the delay guarantee quantitative after the transient.

The result is proved in the paper. As far as the platform record shows it has not been formalized: the related platform items concern the fluid models of Dai and Weiss, which have no parts, no burstiness and no nonpreemption, and a fixed instance of Example 1. This mission produces a machine-checked sample-path model of reentrant lines under buffer priority policies and a checked proof of Theorem 1 with its explicit busy-period constants. The same model serves the sibling mission on LBFS (Theorem 3 of the paper).

Difficulty

A first idea is a work-conservation argument per center: total work arriving at σ\sigmaσ grows at rate ρ<1\rho<1ρ<1 per machine, so the center cannot fall behind. This fails because the work arriving at a center σ\sigmaσ from a later buffer bib_ibi​ depends on how fast the upstream centers have pushed parts to bib_ibi​, and an upstream center can release a burst that the downstream center absorbs only after other buffers have starved; Example 1 is exactly such a cascade under a different priority order. Any argument must therefore bound the delay of a part at a buffer in terms of delays it suffered upstream at other centers, uniformly in the initial state, while nonpreemption lets a part wait up to τˉ\bar\tauτˉ for a machine busy with a lower-priority buffer and the release constraint (1) controls only arrivals to b1b_1b1​, not to later buffers. On sample paths one must also show that the initial parts clear in finite time and that only finitely many parts are served in any bounded interval.

Formalization scope

Lean represents a line by a structure with SSS, mσ>0m_\sigma>0mσ​>0, l>0l>0l>0, the route center : Fin l → Fin S and processing times τ with τi>0\tau_i>0τi​>0. The positivity is a pinned hypothesis: the paper leaves it implicit, its proof divides by τ1\tau_1τ1​, and its only zero processing times are those of Example 1. Buffers are 0-based: the paper's bib_ibi​ is Lean index i−1i-1i−1. The load is written λwˉ\lambda\bar wλwˉ, equal to max⁡σλwσ\max_\sigma\lambda w_\sigmamaxσ​λwσ​ for λ≥0\lambda\ge0λ≥0.

A run is a type of parts with an injective line order, a finite set of initial parts, entry buffers, release times, and for each part and buffer the start of service in WithTop ℝ, ⊤\top⊤ meaning never served. Admissibility imposes, at every t≥0t\ge0t≥0: precedence (service begins after arrival, except that initial parts may be in service at time 000), capacity mσm_\sigmamσ​, nonidling, head of buffer with ties broken by the line order, and the priority rule. All counts use Set.encard. The theorems hold for every admissible run, not for one particular tie-breaking schedule. The constants Γ(i)\Gamma^{(i)}Γ(i) are definitions computed from the line and λ,γ\lambda,\gammaλ,γ; the times T(i)T^{(i)}T(i) are existential after the run.

Two trivializing formalizations are ruled out: start times in ℝ would make every part served by construction and stability half empty, and a capacity constraint stated with Set.ncard would be vacuous for infinitely many parts. Γ\GammaΓ never depends on the part. A sanity file exhibits a nontrivial admissible run satisfying (1) and checks that the empty run is admissible and stable.

The page prints Γ(i)\Gamma^{(i)}Γ(i) (p. 1410) as a product of the two brackets; the inequality it is solved from gives the quotient, which is also the printed form of Γ(1)\Gamma^{(1)}Γ(1), and the formalization uses the quotient.

The sample-path model (Line, Run, Admissible, Arrivals, Stable) is reusable for any buffer priority policy and for the LBFS mission. Contributions welcome: proofs of the milestones in the listed order, lemmas on finiteness of the parts served in bounded time, and interval-counting lemmas for busy periods. Not posed here: Example 1, which is already on the platform as an open problem (QueueingStability.LuKumar.theorem31), Theorems 2–3 (LBFS, sibling mission), Theorems 4–5 and Corollary 1 (due-date policies, several flow lines).

Selected references

  • S. H. Lu and P. R. Kumar, Distributed Scheduling Based on Due Dates and Buffer Priorities, IEEE Transactions on Automatic Control 36(12), 1991, pp. 1406–1416. https://doi.org/10.1109/9.106156
  • P. R. Kumar and T. I. Seidman, Dynamic instabilities and stabilization methods in distributed real-time scheduling of manufacturing systems, IEEE Transactions on Automatic Control 35(3), 1990, pp. 289–298. https://doi.org/10.1109/9.50339
  • P. R. Kumar, Re-entrant lines, Queueing Systems 13, 1993, pp. 87–110. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01158927
  • J. G. Dai, On positive Harris recurrence of multiclass queueing networks: a unified approach via fluid limit models, Annals of Applied Probability 5(1), 1995, pp. 49–77. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoap/1177004828
  • J. G. Dai and G. Weiss, Stability and instability of fluid models for reentrant lines, Mathematics of Operations Research 21(1), 1996, pp. 115–134. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.21.1.115
7 thms1 active userReviewed
OptimizationProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Monte Carlo Bounding Techniques for Determining Solution Quality in Stochastic Programs: The Expected Sample-Average Optimal Value Is a Lower Bound on z* That Improves with Sample SizeResearch Paper

Motivation

Most stochastic programs that arise in practice, such as two-stage stochastic linear programs with recourse, have far too many scenarios to be solved exactly. The standard remedy is sample-average approximation: draw nnn independent observations of the random data, replace the expectation by the sample mean, and solve the resulting deterministic problem. A candidate solution x^\hat xx^ found this way, or by any heuristic, comes with no guarantee. To judge it one needs a bound on its optimality gap Ef(x^,ξ~)−z∗Ef(\hat x,\tilde\xi)-z^*Ef(x^,ξ~​)−z∗, and estimating Ef(x^,ξ~)Ef(\hat x,\tilde\xi)Ef(x^,ξ~​) is routine; what is missing is a lower bound on the unknown optimal value z∗z^*z∗.

Mak, Morton and Wood (Oper. Res. Lett. 24 (1999)) show that the optimal value of the sample-average problem supplies exactly this: its expectation never exceeds z∗z^*z∗, and it can only move closer to z∗z^*z∗ as the sample size grows. The result requires almost no structure of the problem, and it underlies the batch-means confidence intervals on the optimality gap used throughout the stochastic programming literature, including the single- and two-replication procedures of Bayraksan and Morton (2006).

Timeline.

  • 1960: Madansky's wait-and-see bound z∗≥Emin⁡x∈Xf(x,ξ~)z^*\ge E\min_{x\in X}f(x,\tilde\xi)z∗≥Eminx∈X​f(x,ξ~​) (Management Sci. 6), the case n=1n=1n=1 of the result.
  • 1998: Norkin, Pflug and Ruszczyński use stochastic lower bounds of this kind inside a branch-and-bound method (Math. Programming 83); the paper notes that they verified the monotonicity independently.
  • 1999: Mak, Morton and Wood prove Ezn∗≤z∗Ez_n^*\le z^*Ezn∗​≤z∗ (Theorem 1) for arbitrary XXX and Ezn∗≤Ezn+1∗Ez_n^*\le Ez_{n+1}^*Ezn∗​≤Ezn+1∗​ (Theorem 2), and build confidence intervals on the optimality gap from them.

Setting

Let ξ~\tilde\xiξ~​ be a random vector with distribution μ\muμ on a measurable space Ξ\XiΞ, let X⊆RdX\subseteq\mathbb R^dX⊆Rd be a deterministic feasible set, and let f:Rd×Ξ→Rf:\mathbb R^d\times\Xi\to\mathbb Rf:Rd×Ξ→R. The stochastic program is

SPz∗=min⁡x∈XEf(x,ξ~),x∗∈arg⁡min⁡x∈XEf(x,ξ~).\mathrm{SP}\qquad z^*=\min_{x\in X}Ef(x,\tilde\xi),\qquad x^*\in\arg\min_{x\in X}Ef(x,\tilde\xi).SPz∗=x∈Xmin​Ef(x,ξ~​),x∗∈argx∈Xmin​Ef(x,ξ~​).

Let ξ~1,ξ~2,…\tilde\xi^1,\tilde\xi^2,\dotsξ~​1,ξ~​2,… be independent and identically distributed (i.i.d.) from the distribution of ξ~\tilde\xiξ~​, defined on a probability space (Ω,P)(\Omega,P)(Ω,P). The sample-average problem of size n≥1n\ge1n≥1 is

SPnzn∗=min⁡x∈X1n∑i=1nf(x,ξ~i),xn∗∈arg⁡min⁡x∈X1n∑i=1nf(x,ξ~i).\mathrm{SP}_n\qquad z_n^*=\min_{x\in X}\frac1n\sum_{i=1}^n f(x,\tilde\xi^i),\qquad x_n^*\in\arg\min_{x\in X}\frac1n\sum_{i=1}^n f(x,\tilde\xi^i).SPn​zn∗​=x∈Xmin​n1​i=1∑n​f(x,ξ~​i),xn∗​∈argx∈Xmin​n1​i=1∑n​f(x,ξ~​i).

Its optimal value zn∗z_n^*zn∗​ is a random variable. All the zm∗z_m^*zm∗​ are built on the same sequence: zn∗z_n^*zn∗​ uses its first nnn terms and zn+1∗z_{n+1}^*zn+1∗​ its first n+1n+1n+1. Throughout, Ef(x,ξ~)Ef(x,\tilde\xi)Ef(x,ξ~​) is assumed to exist for every x∈Xx\in Xx∈X.

For the proof structure the mission also uses the leave-one-out values

zn,(i)∗=min⁡x∈X1n∑j=1j≠in+1f(x,ξ~j),i=1,…,n+1,z_{n,(i)}^*=\min_{x\in X}\frac1n\sum_{\substack{j=1\\j\ne i}}^{n+1}f(x,\tilde\xi^j),\qquad i=1,\dots,n+1,zn,(i)∗​=x∈Xmin​n1​j=1j=i​∑n+1​f(x,ξ~​j),i=1,…,n+1,

the sample-average optimal values of the n+1n+1n+1 subsamples of size nnn of the first n+1n+1n+1 observations.

Formalization targets

Goal: the lower bound improves with the sample size

Ezn∗ ≤ Ezn+1∗ ≤ z∗(n≥1),Ez_n^*\ \le\ Ez_{n+1}^*\ \le\ z^*\qquad(n\ge1),Ezn∗​ ≤ Ezn+1∗​ ≤ z∗(n≥1),

stated in the Introduction (p. 48) as the paper's main claim, with no assumption on XXX or on f(⋅,ξ~)f(\cdot,\tilde\xi)f(⋅,ξ~​) beyond the existence of the relevant expectations and of optimal solutions.

Milestones

  1. Theorem 1 (p. 49): Ezn∗≤z∗Ez_n^*\le z^*Ezn∗​≤z∗.
  2. Proof of Theorem 2 (p. 50), pathwise: 1n+1∑i=1n+1zn,(i)∗≤zn+1∗\frac1{n+1}\sum_{i=1}^{n+1}z_{n,(i)}^*\le z_{n+1}^*n+11​∑i=1n+1​zn,(i)∗​≤zn+1∗​.
  3. Proof of Theorem 2 (p. 50): Ezn,(i)∗=Ezn∗E z_{n,(i)}^*=Ez_n^*Ezn,(i)∗​=Ezn∗​ for every iii.
  4. Theorem 2 (p. 50): Ezn+1∗≥Ezn∗Ez_{n+1}^*\ge Ez_n^*Ezn+1∗​≥Ezn∗​.

Companion statements

  • The remark after Theorem 1 (p. 49): Emin⁡x∈XF(x,⋅)≤z∗E\min_{x\in X}\mathcal F(x,\cdot)\le z^*Eminx∈X​F(x,⋅)≤z∗ for any unbiased estimator F(x,⋅)\mathcal F(x,\cdot)F(x,⋅) of Ef(x,ξ~)Ef(x,\tilde\xi)Ef(x,ξ~​).
  • The wait-and-see bound (p. 50), z∗≥Emin⁡x∈Xf(x,ξ~)z^*\ge E\min_{x\in X}f(x,\tilde\xi)z∗≥Eminx∈X​f(x,ξ~​).
  • Display (9) (p. 52): for x^∈X\hat x\in Xx^∈X and Gn=1n∑if(x^,ξ~i)−zn∗G_n=\frac1n\sum_i f(\hat x,\tilde\xi^i)-z_n^*Gn​=n1​∑i​f(x^,ξ~​i)−zn∗​, Gn≥0G_n\ge0Gn​≥0 and EGn≥Ef(x^,ξ~)−z∗EG_n\ge Ef(\hat x,\tilde\xi)-z^*EGn​≥Ef(x^,ξ~​)−z∗.

Significance

Theorem 1 turns any sampling-based solver into a source of statistical lower bounds on z∗z^*z∗: averaging independent replications of zn∗z_n^*zn∗​ gives a confidence interval for a lower bound, and display (9) combines it with an upper-bound estimator into an estimator of the optimality gap that is nonnegative by construction. Theorem 2 justifies increasing the sample size: the bias z∗−Ezn∗z^*-Ez_n^*z∗−Ezn∗​ is nonincreasing in nnn. Both results are used, often without proof, in the analysis of sample-average approximation and of the gap-estimation procedures built on it.

The results are proved, in this paper and in textbooks (e.g. Shapiro, Dentcheva and Ruszczyński, Lectures on Stochastic Programming). To our knowledge none of them is machine-checked. On Prove2Me, a special case of Theorem 1 under continuity, compactness and a square-integrable envelope is posed but unproved (SolutionQuality.SRP.display1_negative_bias), and the wait-and-see inequality is proved for finitely many scenarios in an extended-real model (StochasticProg.ValueOfInfo.prop1_ws_le_rp_le_eev). This mission states the general versions, for arbitrary feasible sets and integrable costs, on a measure-theoretic i.i.d. model.

Difficulty

Theorem 1 is short on paper; in a formal setting its difficulty is bookkeeping: minima over arbitrary sets and expectations of possibly non-integrable functions both need explicit hypotheses to mean what the paper means. Theorem 2 is harder. The natural first attempt compares zn∗z_n^*zn∗​ and zn+1∗z_{n+1}^*zn+1∗​ on the same sample path, but no pathwise inequality holds in either direction: one extra observation can raise or lower the sample-average optimum. The monotonicity holds only in expectation, so any argument must use the joint law of the infinite i.i.d. sequence, including the law of its subsequences, and measurability of zn∗z_n^*zn∗​ as a function of the sample path.

Formalization scope

The model is the published definition file SolutionQuality.SRP.Setting: decisions lie in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d), μ\muμ is a probability measure on Ξ\XiΞ, the sample is an i.i.d. sequence ξ : ℕ → Ω → Ξ (the paper's ξ~i\tilde\xi^iξ~​i is ξ (i-1)), and z∗z^*z∗, zn∗z_n^*zn∗​, GnG_nGn​ and the optimality gap are its optValue, saaValue, gapEstimate and optGap. The mission adds skipIndex, the leave-one-out value looValue and the path law pathLaw.

Committed conventions:

  • XXX is an arbitrary set: no convexity, closedness or compactness, and f(⋅,ξ)f(\cdot,\xi)f(⋅,ξ) has no continuity (p. 49: "X need not be convex …").
  • Minima are conditionally complete infima (sInf), and expectations are Bochner integrals. Both take the value 000 on bad inputs, so every statement carries the hypotheses that keep them genuine:
    • integrability of f(x,⋅)f(x,\cdot)f(x,⋅) for x∈Xx\in Xx∈X (the first-moment half of the paper's standing assumption; the second moments are not used and are omitted);
    • attainment of z∗z^*z∗ (the paper's x∗∈arg⁡min⁡x^*\in\arg\minx∗∈argmin);
    • almost-sure attainment of every SPm\mathrm{SP}_mSPm​ (the paper's xm∗∈arg⁡min⁡x_m^*\in\arg\minxm∗​∈argmin), stated for the law of the sample path, or almost-sure boundedness below where that suffices;
    • integrability of zn∗z_n^*zn∗​ and zn+1∗z_{n+1}^*zn+1∗​ ("Ezn∗Ez_n^*Ezn∗​ exists");
    • measurability of zn∗z_n^*zn∗​ as a function of the sample path ("zn∗z_n^*zn∗​ is a random variable"), for Theorem 2 only. It holds, e.g., for countable XXX or for f(⋅,ξ)f(\cdot,\xi)f(⋅,ξ) continuous on XXX; it fails for arbitrary XXX and fff, which is why it is assumed.
  • n≥1n\ge1n≥1 throughout, since the empty sample mean is 000.

These hypotheses are disclosed in each statement and are satisfiable: a sanity instance with XXX a singleton satisfies all of them. A formalization that dropped the integrability of zn∗z_n^*zn∗​, or that allowed z0∗z_0^*z0∗​, would make the goal false or vacuous, and one that assumed continuity and compactness would restate the special case already on the platform; neither is in scope.

A complete development needs: the expectation of a sample mean under an i.i.d. law; the identification of the law of fun j => ξ (skipIndex i j) · with Measure.infinitePi (fun _ => μ) (Mathlib's iIndepFun_iff_map_fun_eq_infinitePi_map); and the averaging identity behind the leave-one-out decomposition. The reindexing lemma for i.i.d. sequences is reusable well beyond this mission. Proofs of the milestones, and alternative arguments for Theorem 2, are welcome.

Selected references

  • W.-K. Mak, D. P. Morton, R. K. Wood, Monte Carlo bounding techniques for determining solution quality in stochastic programs, Operations Research Letters 24 (1999) 47–56. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0167-6377(98)00054-6
  • A. Madansky, Inequalities for stochastic linear programming problems, Management Science 6 (1960) 197–204. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.6.2.197
  • V. I. Norkin, G. Ch. Pflug, A. Ruszczyński, A branch and bound method for stochastic global optimization, Mathematical Programming 83 (1998) 425–450. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02680569
  • G. Bayraksan, D. P. Morton, Assessing solution quality in stochastic programs, Mathematical Programming 108 (2006) 495–514. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-006-0720-x
  • A. Shapiro, D. Dentcheva, A. Ruszczyński, Lectures on Stochastic Programming: Modeling and Theory, SIAM, 2009. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898718751
7 thms1 active userReviewed
Control TheoryDynamical Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Dynamic Instabilities and Stabilization Methods in Distributed Real-Time Scheduling of Manufacturing Systems 2: Stable and Unstable Modes Coexist Under Clearing on a Two-Part-Type SystemResearch Paper

Motivation

Flexible manufacturing systems are often scheduled by simple distributed rules: each machine looks only at its own buffers and decides, in real time, which part type to work on next. Switching from one part type to another costs a set-up time during which the machine produces nothing, so a natural rule is to work on a buffer until it is empty and only then switch. Perkins and Kumar (IEEE Trans. Automat. Control 34, 1989; reference [18] of the paper) showed that such clearing policies, and in particular clear-a-fraction policies, keep every buffer bounded on acyclic systems whenever each machine has spare capacity. Whether the same holds when material flows around a cycle of machines was left open.

Kumar and Seidman (IEEE TAC 35(3), 1990) answered it negatively by two examples. Example 1 is a single re-entrant part type. Example 2, the subject of this mission, has two part types, neither of which ever revisits a machine, and shows two further phenomena: instability without re-entrance, and the coexistence, for one and the same system, of a bounded periodic regime and an unbounded one, selected only by the initial state.

Setting

A manufacturing system has part types ppp arriving at rates dpd_pdp​ and machines mmm. Parts of type ppp follow a fixed route; at stage iii they wait in buffer bp,ib_{p,i}bp,i​ at machine μp,i\mu_{p,i}μp,i​, and processing one of them takes τp,i\tau_{p,i}τp,i​. Switching a machine from buffer bbb to buffer b′b'b′ takes the set-up time δb,b′\delta_{b,b'}δb,b′​. Flows are continuous: xb(t)x_b(t)xb​(t) is the level of buffer bbb, ub(t)u_b(t)ub​(t) and yb(t)y_b(t)yb​(t) are its cumulative input and output, and

xb(t)=xb(0)+ub(t)−yb(t)≥0.x_b(t)=x_b(0)+u_b(t)-y_b(t)\ge 0 .xb​(t)=xb​(0)+ub​(t)−yb​(t)≥0.

A machine works in runs: a set-up for a buffer, then processing it at rate 1/τb1/\tau_b1/τb​ while it is nonempty, and at the rate of its inflow while it is empty. A clearing policy (Definition 1) keeps a machine on a buffer bbb until the first time that bbb is empty and another of its buffers is nonempty, and then sets it up for one of those. The system is stable if sup⁡0≤t<∞xb(t)<∞\sup_{0\le t<\infty}x_b(t)<\inftysup0≤t<∞​xb​(t)<∞ for every buffer bbb.

Example 2 (Fig. 3) has two part types with d1=d2=1d_1=d_2=1d1​=d2​=1 and two machines. Part type 1 visits buffer 1 at machine 1 and then buffer 2 at machine 2; part type 2 visits buffer 3 at machine 2 and then buffer 4 at machine 1. Processing times are τ1,…,τ4\tau_1,\dots,\tau_4τ1​,…,τ4​ and setting up to buffer kkk takes δk>0\delta_k>0δk​>0. The parameters satisfy the capacity condition (1), τ1+τ4<1\tau_1+\tau_4<1τ1​+τ4​<1 and τ2+τ3<1\tau_2+\tau_3<1τ2​+τ3​<1, and

τ2+τ4>1,δ1+δ41−τ1−τ4=δ2+δ31−τ2−τ3=:η,δ4<(1−τ3−τ4)η,δ2<(1−τ1−τ2)η,\tau_2+\tau_4>1,\qquad \frac{\delta_1+\delta_4}{1-\tau_1-\tau_4}=\frac{\delta_2+\delta_3}{1-\tau_2-\tau_3}=:\eta,\qquad \delta_4<(1-\tau_3-\tau_4)\eta,\qquad \delta_2<(1-\tau_1-\tau_2)\eta,τ2​+τ4​>1,1−τ1​−τ4​δ1​+δ4​​=1−τ2​−τ3​δ2​+δ3​​=:η,δ4​<(1−τ3​−τ4​)η,δ2​<(1−τ1​−τ2​)η,

conditions (7)–(10). The paper's feasible instance is (τ1,τ2,τ3,τ4,δ1,δ2,δ3,δ4)=(14,12,14,23,130,15,120,120)(\tau_1,\tau_2,\tau_3,\tau_4,\delta_1,\delta_2,\delta_3,\delta_4)=(\tfrac14,\tfrac12,\tfrac14,\tfrac23,\tfrac1{30},\tfrac15,\tfrac1{20},\tfrac1{20})(τ1​,τ2​,τ3​,τ4​,δ1​,δ2​,δ3​,δ4​)=(41​,21​,41​,32​,301​,51​,201​,201​), with η=1\eta=1η=1. For this system there is exactly one clearing policy.

Formalization targets

Goal: stable and unstable modes coexist

For every parameter set satisfying (1) and (7)–(10):

from x(0)=(0,η,0,η), set-ups (b1,b3): a clearing trajectory exists, and every one is bounded;∃ ξ0 ∀ ξ≥ξ0, from x(0)=(ξ,0,0,0), set-ups (b4,b3): a clearing trajectory exists, and every one has sup⁡t≥0x1(t)=+∞.\begin{aligned} &\text{from } x(0)=(0,\eta,0,\eta),\ \text{set-ups } (b_1,b_3):\ \text{a clearing trajectory exists, and every one is bounded;}\\ &\exists\,\xi_0\ \forall\,\xi\ge\xi_0,\ \text{from } x(0)=(\xi,0,0,0),\ \text{set-ups } (b_4,b_3):\ \text{a clearing trajectory exists, and every one has } \sup_{t\ge0}x_1(t)=+\infty . \end{aligned}​from x(0)=(0,η,0,η), set-ups (b1​,b3​): a clearing trajectory exists, and every one is bounded;∃ξ0​ ∀ξ≥ξ0​, from x(0)=(ξ,0,0,0), set-ups (b4​,b3​): a clearing trajectory exists, and every one has t≥0sup​x1​(t)=+∞.​

Milestones

  1. Case 1, periodic regime: under (1) and (8)–(10), every clearing trajectory from (0,η,0,η)(0,\eta,0,\eta)(0,η,0,η), (b1,b3)(b_1,b_3)(b1​,b3​) satisfies x(η)=(0,η,0,η)x(\eta)=(0,\eta,0,\eta)x(η)=(0,η,0,η) with the same set-ups.
  2. Case 2, Stage 8: under (1) and (7), for large ξ\xiξ, with t9=(ξ+τ2−1(δ1+δ2))/(τ2−1−1)t_9=(\xi+\tau_2^{-1}(\delta_1+\delta_2))/(\tau_2^{-1}-1)t9​=(ξ+τ2−1​(δ1​+δ2​))/(τ2−1​−1): x(t9)=(0,0,t9−δ1,0)x(t_9)=(0,0,t_9-\delta_1,0)x(t9​)=(0,0,t9​−δ1​,0), machine 1 set up for buffer 1, machine 2 for buffer 2.
  3. Case 2, full cycle: under (1) and (7), for large ξ\xiξ, at an explicit time t17t_{17}t17​, x(t17)=(λξ+α,0,0,0)x(t_{17})=(\lambda\xi+\alpha,0,0,0)x(t17​)=(λξ+α,0,0,0) with set-ups (b4,b3)(b_4,b_3)(b4​,b3​), where λ=τ2τ4/((1−τ2)(1−τ4))>1\lambda=\tau_2\tau_4/((1-\tau_2)(1-\tau_4))>1λ=τ2​τ4​/((1−τ2​)(1−τ4​))>1.

Significance

The result shows that stability of a scheduling policy is a property of the initial state as well as of the system: the same parameters admit a bounded periodic orbit and an orbit along which the backlog of buffer 1 is multiplied by λ>1\lambda>1λ>1 in every cycle. The capacity condition (1) holds throughout, so the instability does not come from overload: spare capacity is lost because one machine starves the other. The example also shows that a cycle in the machine graph suffices, without any part type revisiting a machine. Sections IV and V of the paper respond to this by giving a stronger capacity condition under which clear-a-fraction policies are stable, and a supervisory mechanism that stabilizes any policy.

The paper's argument is a stage-by-stage computation of a piecewise-linear trajectory. It has not been machine-checked. A formalization fixes what a clearing trajectory is (including the switching instants at which a buffer is empty but just starting to fill), proves that the trajectories exist and are determined by the initial state, and checks the paper's closed forms. One printed constant is wrong: the offset α\alphaα of the full cycle lacks a final −δ3-\delta_3−δ3​, and the milestone states the corrected value.

Difficulty

The computations within each stage are linear algebra. The difficulty is the event structure. Every stage depends on the order in which the two machines' events occur: whether machine 1 clears buffer 1 before machine 2 has finished its set-ups, whether buffer 2 is still nonempty when buffer 1 empties, and so on. These orderings hold only for ξ\xiξ large, or only because (8) holds with equality and (9)–(10) hold strictly. The periodic regime depends on exact synchronization. In Case 2, a machine processing an empty buffer at the reduced rate must not be forced off it while its other buffer is empty and not yet fed. A proof must also establish existence of each trajectory, not only compute it.

Formalization scope

  • Model. The general system has part types Fin P, machines Fin M, buffers as pairs (p,i)(p,i)(p,i) with Lean index iii for paper stage i+1i+1i+1, real time, and no transport delay or assembly (as in the paper). Example 2 is an instance of this general model, with machines 1, 2 as Lean 0, 1.
  • Runs. Each machine follows a sequence of runs. Run 0 is on the initial set-up and has no set-up phase. Run k≥1k\ge1k≥1 has a set-up phase of length δβk−1,βk\delta_{\beta_{k-1},\beta_k}δβk−1​,βk​​, followed by a processing phase. Runs are never cut during a set-up. If there are infinitely many runs, their start times tend to ∞\infty∞. There is no idling outside runs: a machine serving an empty buffer passes on its inflow.
  • Set-up times. They depend only on the target buffer, and δb,b=0\delta_{b,b}=0δb,b​=0 is never used.
  • Processing law. The rate cap is yb(t)−yb(s)≤(1/τb)⋅y_b(t)-y_b(s)\le(1/\tau_b)\cdotyb​(t)−yb​(s)≤(1/τb​)⋅(processing time of bbb in [s,t][s,t][s,t]). Rate is exactly 1/τb1/\tau_b1/τb​ while the machine is processing a nonempty buffer.
  • Clearing. "Nonempty" in Definition 1 is read as demanding: positive level, or cumulative input strictly increasing from that instant. Under the literal reading the paper's own switching instants would not be "first times", and no clearing trajectory would exist from these initial states. The no-early-exit condition is imposed on the open processing interval.
  • Set up for bbb at ttt. At t>0t>0t>0 this refers to the run whose interval (sk,sk+1](s_k,s_{k+1}](sk​,sk+1​] contains ttt.
  • Ruling out trivial formalizations. The goal asserts existence of a clearing trajectory in both modes, so neither "every trajectory is bounded" nor "every trajectory is unbounded" can hold vacuously. η\etaη is computed from the data rather than pinned by hypotheses, and (8) is an equality.

Contributions welcome: existence and uniqueness of clearing trajectories for the two-machine instance, the event-ordering lemmas for large ξ\xiξ, the restart (time-shift) property of trajectories, and the three milestones.

Selected references

  • P. R. Kumar and T. I. Seidman, Dynamic instabilities and stabilization methods in distributed real-time scheduling of manufacturing systems, IEEE Transactions on Automatic Control 35(3):289–298, 1990. https://doi.org/10.1109/9.50339
  • J. R. Perkins and P. R. Kumar, Stable, distributed, real-time scheduling of flexible manufacturing/assembly/disassembly systems, IEEE Transactions on Automatic Control 34:139–148, February 1989 (reference [18] of the paper).
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Numerical AnalysisOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Globally Convergent Inexact Newton Methods II: Trust Region Limit Points Are Stationary Points of ‖F‖, and Near a Zero Where F′ Is Invertible the Full Newton Step Is Eventually TakenResearch Paper

Motivation

Solving a system of nonlinear equations F(x)=0F(x)=0F(x)=0, with F:Rn→RnF:\mathbf R^n\to\mathbf R^nF:Rn→Rn continuously differentiable, is a basic task in numerical analysis and optimization: it is the inner step of interior-point and sequential quadratic programming methods, of implicit time-stepping for differential equations, and of equilibrium computations in operations research. Newton's method converges fast near a solution at which the derivative F′F'F′ is invertible, but from a poor starting point it may fail. Trust region methods are a standard globalization: each step minimizes the norm of the local linear model F(xk)+F′(xk)sF(x_k)+F'(x_k)sF(xk​)+F′(xk​)s over a ball ∥s∥≤δk\|s\|\le\delta_k∥s∥≤δk​, and the radius δk\delta_kδk​ is shrunk or enlarged according to how well the model predicted the actual decrease of ∥F∥\|F\|∥F∥ (Moré and Sorensen 1983; Dennis and Schnabel 1983, §6.4).

Eisenstat and Walker (1994) developed a general global convergence theory for inexact Newton methods, in which steps only reduce the linear model's norm by a factor ηk<1\eta_k<1ηk​<1 and must also give sufficient decrease of ∥F∥\|F\|∥F∥. Their §4, Application 1, shows that this theory also covers trust region methods. This mission formalizes that application.

Setting

Let EEE be a finite-dimensional real vector space with an arbitrary norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥ (the paper's Rn\mathbf R^nRn; the norm need not be Euclidean), and F:E→EF:E\to EF:E→E continuously differentiable with derivative F′(x)F'(x)F′(x). For a point xkx_kxk​ and a step sss, the actual reduction and predicted reduction are

ared⁡k(s)=∥F(xk)∥−∥F(xk+s)∥,pred⁡k(s)=∥F(xk)∥−∥F(xk)+F′(xk)s∥.\operatorname{ared}_k(s)=\|F(x_k)\|-\|F(x_k+s)\|,\qquad \operatorname{pred}_k(s)=\|F(x_k)\|-\|F(x_k)+F'(x_k)s\|.aredk​(s)=∥F(xk​)∥−∥F(xk​+s)∥,predk​(s)=∥F(xk​)∥−∥F(xk​)+F′(xk​)s∥.

A point xxx is a stationary point of ∥F∥\|F\|∥F∥ if ∥F(x)∥≤∥F(x)+F′(x)s∥\|F(x)\|\le\|F(x)+F'(x)s\|∥F(x)∥≤∥F(x)+F′(x)s∥ for every sss: no step decreases the norm of the linear model. A point x∗x_*x∗​ is a limit point of (xk)(x_k)(xk​) if every ball around x∗x_*x∗​ contains xkx_kxk​ for infinitely many kkk.

Algorithm TR is given x0x_0x0​, δˉ0>0\bar\delta_0>0δˉ0​>0, 0<t≤u<10<t\le u<10<t≤u<1 and 0<θmin⁡<θmax⁡<10<\theta_{\min}<\theta_{\max}<10<θmin​<θmax​<1. At iteration kkk it sets δk=δˉk\delta_k=\bar\delta_kδk​=δˉk​ and picks a step

sk∈arg⁡min⁡∥s∥≤δk∥F(xk)+F′(xk)s∥.(4.5)s_k\in\arg\min_{\|s\|\le\delta_k}\|F(x_k)+F'(x_k)s\|.\tag{4.5}sk​∈arg∥s∥≤δk​min​∥F(xk​)+F′(xk​)s∥.(4.5)

While ared⁡k(sk)<t⋅pred⁡k(sk)\operatorname{ared}_k(s_k)<t\cdot\operatorname{pred}_k(s_k)aredk​(sk​)<t⋅predk​(sk​), it replaces δk\delta_kδk​ by θδk\theta\delta_kθδk​ for some θ∈[θmin⁡,θmax⁡]\theta\in[\theta_{\min},\theta_{\max}]θ∈[θmin​,θmax​] and picks a new sks_ksk​ by (4.5). Then xk+1=xk+skx_{k+1}=x_k+s_kxk+1​=xk​+sk​, and the next initial radius satisfies δˉk+1≥δk\bar\delta_{k+1}\ge\delta_kδˉk+1​≥δk​ if ared⁡k(sk)≥u⋅pred⁡k(sk)\operatorname{ared}_k(s_k)\ge u\cdot\operatorname{pred}_k(s_k)aredk​(sk​)≥u⋅predk​(sk​), and δˉk+1≥θmin⁡δk\bar\delta_{k+1}\ge\theta_{\min}\delta_kδˉk+1​≥θmin​δk​ otherwise. The algorithm does not break down if it generates an infinite sequence of iterates.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.4

If Algorithm TR does not break down, then

every limit point x∗ of (xk) is a stationary point of ∥F∥,\text{every limit point } x_* \text{ of } (x_k) \text{ is a stationary point of } \|F\|,every limit point x∗​ of (xk​) is a stationary point of ∥F∥,

and if x∗x_*x∗​ is a limit point with F′(x∗)F'(x_*)F′(x∗​) invertible, then

F(x∗)=0,xk→x∗,sk=−F′(xk)−1F(xk) for all sufficiently large k.F(x_*)=0,\qquad x_k\to x_*,\qquad s_k=-F'(x_k)^{-1}F(x_k)\ \text{for all sufficiently large }k.F(x∗​)=0,xk​→x∗​,sk​=−F′(xk​)−1F(xk​) for all sufficiently large k.

The statement has no constants, and it holds for every choice the algorithm leaves open: the minimizer in (4.5), the factors θ\thetaθ, and the new radii.

Milestones

  1. Corollary 3.7. Any sequence with pred⁡k(sk)≥0\operatorname{pred}_k(s_k)\ge0predk​(sk​)≥0 and ared⁡k(sk)≥t⋅pred⁡k(sk)\operatorname{ared}_k(s_k)\ge t\cdot\operatorname{pred}_k(s_k)aredk​(sk​)≥t⋅predk​(sk​), sk=xk+1−xks_k=x_{k+1}-x_ksk​=xk+1​−xk​, for which ∥sk∥≤Γ⋅pred⁡k(sk)\|s_k\|\le\Gamma\cdot\operatorname{pred}_k(s_k)∥sk​∥≤Γ⋅predk​(sk​) near a limit point x∗x_*x∗​, converges to x∗x_*x∗​.
  2. Lemma 4.2. If F′(x∗)F'(x_*)F′(x∗​) is invertible, then for some Γ>0\Gamma>0Γ>0, ϵ∗>0\epsilon_*>0ϵ∗​>0, every minimizer sss of (4.5) with any radius δ>0\delta>0δ>0 and ∥x−x∗∥<ϵ∗\|x-x_*\|<\epsilon_*∥x−x∗​∥<ϵ∗​ satisfies ∥s∥≤Γ{∥F(x)∥−∥F(x)+F′(x)s∥}\|s\|\le\Gamma\{\|F(x)\|-\|F(x)+F'(x)s\|\}∥s∥≤Γ{∥F(x)∥−∥F(x)+F′(x)s∥} (4.6).
  3. Lemma 4.3. If x∗x_*x∗​ is not a stationary point of ∥F∥\|F\|∥F∥, then (4.6) holds for radii 0<δ≤δ∗0<\delta\le\delta_*0<δ≤δ∗​ and xxx near x∗x_*x∗​.
  4. Lemma 4.1. For a run of Algorithm TR, if ∥sk∥≤Γ⋅pred⁡k(sk)\|s_k\|\le\Gamma\cdot\operatorname{pred}_k(s_k)∥sk​∥≤Γ⋅predk​(sk​) (4.1) holds for every trial step of iterations with xkx_kxk​ near a limit point x∗x_*x∗​ and kkk large, then xk→x∗x_k\to x_*xk​→x∗​ and lim inf⁡kδk>0\liminf_k\delta_k>0liminfk​δk​>0.

An extra item, Corollary 3.6, states that such a sequence with ∑krelpred⁡k(sk)\sum_k\operatorname{relpred}_k(s_k)∑k​relpredk​(sk​) divergent has F(xk)→0F(x_k)\to0F(xk​)→0, where relpred⁡k(sk)=pred⁡k(sk)/∥F(xk)∥\operatorname{relpred}_k(s_k)=\operatorname{pred}_k(s_k)/\|F(x_k)\|relpredk​(sk​)=predk​(sk​)/∥F(xk​)∥ (or 111 if F(xk)=0F(x_k)=0F(xk​)=0).

Significance

Theorem 4.4 is a global convergence result that assumes neither bounded level sets, nor the existence of a solution, nor an inner-product norm. It separates two conclusions: without any regularity, the only possible accumulation points are stationary points of ∥F∥\|F\|∥F∥; at an accumulation point where F′F'F′ is invertible, the method finds a solution, converges to it, and eventually takes the full Newton step. The paper assumes only continuous differentiability, which does not by itself give a quadratic convergence rate. Lemmas 4.2 and 4.3 are local facts about minimizers of the linear model's norm over a ball and apply to any method that uses such steps.

The result is proved in the paper. As far as we know, none of it is formalized: Mathlib has the Fréchet derivative, the inverse function theorem and invertible continuous linear maps, but no trust region or inexact Newton convergence theory. This mission produces machine-checked versions of the paper's statements for an arbitrary norm, together with a reusable vocabulary (actual/predicted reduction, stationary points of ∥F∥\|F\|∥F∥, model minimizers, trust region runs) for later formalizations of trust region and Levenberg–Marquardt type methods.

Difficulty

The obvious argument shows that ∥F(xk)∥\|F(x_k)\|∥F(xk​)∥ decreases, so it converges, and then tries to conclude that the predicted reductions tend to zero. That step fails without control on the radii: if δk→0\delta_k\to0δk​→0, small predicted reductions say nothing about stationarity, and the steps could shrink while the iterates still wander. The central difficulty is to show that near a non-stationary or regular limit point the radii stay bounded away from zero, while at the same time proving that the whole sequence converges to that limit point, not just a subsequence. Under an arbitrary norm the model minimizer is not unique and the model norm is not smooth, so arguments based on gradients of 12∥F∥22\frac12\|F\|_2^221​∥F∥22​ do not apply.

Formalization scope

  • Rn\mathbf R^nRn with an arbitrary norm is a finite-dimensional real normed space E; F′F'F′ is fderiv ℝ F, and "continuously differentiable" is ContDiff ℝ 1 F.
  • A run of Algorithm TR is the predicate IsTRRun. Iteration kkk records the number mkm_kmk​ of while-loop passes, the factors θk,j∈[θmin⁡,θmax⁡]\theta_{k,j}\in[\theta_{\min},\theta_{\max}]θk,j​∈[θmin​,θmax​], and trial steps sk,0,…,sk,mks_{k,0},\dots,s_{k,m_k}sk,0​,…,sk,mk​​, each a minimizer of (4.5) for its radius. Trials j<mkj<m_kj<mk​ fail the test ared⁡≥t⋅pred⁡\operatorname{ared}\ge t\cdot\operatorname{pred}ared≥t⋅pred, and trial mkm_kmk​ passes it. "Does not break down" is the existence of such a run. Any minimizer in (4.5) may be chosen.
  • "Limit point" is MapClusterPt. "Sufficiently near x∗x_*x∗​ and kkk sufficiently large" is: there exist ρ>0\rho>0ρ>0 and KKK such that the property holds for k≥Kk\ge Kk≥K with ∥xk−x∗∥<ρ\|x_k-x_*\|<\rho∥xk​−x∗​∥<ρ. "Whenever kkk is sufficiently large" is ∀ᶠ k in atTop.
  • "F′(x∗)F'(x_*)F′(x∗​) invertible" is (fderiv ℝ F xstar).IsInvertible. F′(xk)−1F'(x_k)^{-1}F′(xk​)−1 is ContinuousLinearMap.inverse, which is the true inverse for all large kkk.
  • "lim inf⁡δk>0\liminf\delta_k>0liminfδk​>0" is "eventually δk≥c\delta_k\ge cδk​≥c for some c>0c>0c>0"; "∑relpred⁡\sum\operatorname{relpred}∑relpred divergent" is ¬ Summable.
  • In Lemma 4.1, (4.1) is required for every trial step sk,js_{k,j}sk,j​ of iterations with xkx_kxk​ near x∗x_*x∗​ and kkk large: in Algorithm TR the symbol sks_ksk​ takes the value of each trial step, and the proof on p. 403 applies (4.1) to trial steps. Requiring it for the accepted step alone would make the lemma false. Lemmas 4.2 and 4.3 are stated with Γ>0\Gamma>0Γ>0.
  • No statement assumes F(x∗)=0F(x_*)=0F(x∗​)=0, xk→x∗x_k\to x_*xk​→x∗​, bounded level sets, a Euclidean norm or a Lipschitz derivative: those are conclusions or absent from the paper. A run predicate that forced zero steps or zero radii would make the convergence claims trivial; IsTRRun forces neither, and it has a run with nonzero steps (for F=idF=\mathrm{id}F=id on R\mathbf RR).

Needed infrastructure: the continuity of x↦F′(x)−1x\mapsto F'(x)^{-1}x↦F′(x)−1 near an invertible point (Lemma 1.1 of the paper), a uniform linearization bound ∥F(y)−F(x)−F′(x)(y−x)∥≤ε∥y−x∥\|F(y)-F(x)-F'(x)(y-x)\|\le\varepsilon\|y-x\|∥F(y)−F(x)−F′(x)(y−x)∥≤ε∥y−x∥ near a point (Lemma 1.2), and the telescoping argument of Theorem 3.5. These are reusable well beyond this mission. Contributions are welcome on each milestone separately, and on general lemmas about minimizers of ∥a+Ls∥\|a+Ls\|∥a+Ls∥ over a ball.

Selected references

  • S. C. Eisenstat and H. F. Walker, Globally Convergent Inexact Newton Methods, SIAM Journal on Optimization 4(2) (1994) 393–422. https://doi.org/10.1137/0804022
  • J. J. Moré and D. C. Sorensen, Computing a Trust Region Step, SIAM Journal on Scientific and Statistical Computing 4(3) (1983) 553–572. https://doi.org/10.1137/0904038
  • J. E. Dennis Jr. and R. B. Schnabel, Numerical Methods for Unconstrained Optimization and Nonlinear Equations, Prentice-Hall 1983; SIAM reprint 1996. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611971200
  • R. S. Dembo, S. C. Eisenstat and T. Steihaug, Inexact Newton Methods, SIAM Journal on Numerical Analysis 19(2) (1982) 400–408. https://doi.org/10.1137/0719025
7 thms1 active userReviewed
Control TheoryDynamical Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Dynamic Instabilities and Stabilization Methods in Distributed Real-Time Scheduling of Manufacturing Systems 4: A Run-Truncating Priority-Queue Supervisor Keeps Every Buffer Bounded When ρₘ < 1Research Paper

Motivation

A flexible manufacturing system routes several part types through a set of machines; a machine that switches from one kind of part to another must spend a set-up time first. Each machine has to decide, in real time and from local information only, which of its waiting buffers to work on and for how long. Long runs waste little time on set-ups but starve other buffers; short runs do the opposite.

Kumar and Seidman (IEEE TAC 35(3), 1990) showed in §III of the paper that natural distributed rules (clearing policies, which keep processing a buffer until it is empty) can be unstable when parts revisit machines, even though every machine has enough capacity. Their §IV gives a sufficient condition for a subclass of such rules to be stable, which is stricter than the capacity condition. §V, the subject of this mission, asks for something stronger: a simple, distributed mechanism that a supervisor can add to any scheduling policy and that makes the system stable whenever the capacity condition alone holds.

Timeline. Perkins and Kumar (1989) proved that the capacity condition is sufficient for the existence of some stabilizing policy, and that every clear-a-fraction policy is stable on acyclic systems. Kumar and Seidman (1990) gave the instability examples for nonacyclic systems and the universal supervisor formalized here.

Setting

There are PPP part types and MMM machines. Part type ppp arrives at rate dp>0d_p>0dp​>0 and follows a route of npn_pnp​ operations; operation iii is done by machine μp,i\mu_{p,i}μp,i​ and takes τp,i>0\tau_{p,i}>0τp,i​>0 per part. Parts awaiting operation iii wait in buffer bp,ib_{p,i}bp,i​, with level xp,i(t)≥0x_{p,i}(t)\ge 0xp,i​(t)≥0. Machine mmm serves Bm={bp,i:μp,i=m}B_m=\{b_{p,i}:\mu_{p,i}=m\}Bm​={bp,i​:μp,i​=m}, and switching from bbb to b′b'b′ costs δb,b′≥0\delta_{b,b'}\ge 0δb,b′​≥0. Flows are continuous: a machine processing a nonempty buffer bp,ib_{p,i}bp,i​ drains it at rate 1/τp,i1/\tau_{p,i}1/τp,i​, the output feeds bp,i+1b_{p,i+1}bp,i+1​ instantly, and a machine on an empty buffer passes its inflow through. Each machine works in runs: a set-up, then a processing phase on one buffer.

The load of machine mmm and the capacity condition are

ρm:=∑(p,i): μp,i=mdpτp,i<1(1≤m≤M).(1)\rho_m:=\sum_{(p,i):\,\mu_{p,i}=m}d_p\tau_{p,i}<1\qquad(1\le m\le M). \tag{1}ρm​:=(p,i):μp,i​=m∑​dp​τp,i​<1(1≤m≤M).(1)

The system is stable if sup⁡0≤t<∞xp,i(t)<∞\sup_{0\le t<\infty}x_{p,i}(t)<\inftysup0≤t<∞​xp,i​(t)<∞ for every buffer.

The supervisor picks γm\gamma_mγm​ with

γm(1−ρm)>∑b∈Bmmax⁡b′∈Bmδb′,b(24)\gamma_m(1-\rho_m)>\sum_{b\in B_m}\max_{b'\in B_m}\delta_{b',b} \tag{24}γm​(1−ρm​)>b∈Bm​∑​b′∈Bm​max​δb′,b​(24)

and thresholds zp,i≥0z_{p,i}\ge0zp,i​≥0. It truncates every processing run of bp,ib_{p,i}bp,i​ at γmdpτp,i\gamma_m d_p\tau_{p,i}γm​dp​τp,i​; it keeps a first-come first-served queue QmQ_mQm​ of the buffers that are not being processed and whose level exceeds zp,iz_{p,i}zp,i​; when a run ends and Qm≠∅Q_m\ne\emptysetQm​=∅, the head of QmQ_mQm​ is processed next, for exactly γmdpτp,i\gamma_m d_p\tau_{p,i}γm​dp​τp,i​ unless it clears earlier. When QmQ_mQm​ is empty the underlying policy is free. Write ζm:=γm(1−ρm)−∑b∈Bmmax⁡b′∈Bmδb′,b>0\zeta_m:=\gamma_m(1-\rho_m)-\sum_{b\in B_m}\max_{b'\in B_m}\delta_{b',b}>0ζm​:=γm​(1−ρm​)−∑b∈Bm​​maxb′∈Bm​​δb′,b​>0 (26) and βp,i(t):=∑j≤iτp,ixp,j(t)\beta_{p,i}(t):=\sum_{j\le i}\tau_{p,i}x_{p,j}(t)βp,i​(t):=∑j≤i​τp,i​xp,j​(t), the backlog of part type ppp for machine μp,i\mu_{p,i}μp,i​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2

Under (1), (24) and z≥0z\ge 0z≥0, every supervised trajectory, from every initial state, satisfies

sup⁡0≤t<∞xp,i(t)<+∞for all p,i.\sup_{0\le t<\infty}x_{p,i}(t)<+\infty\qquad\text{for all }p,i.0≤t<∞sup​xp,i​(t)<+∞for all p,i.

The bound is allowed to depend on the trajectory; no uniformity in the initial state is claimed.

Milestones: Lemma 1

  1. A buffer that enters QmQ_mQm​ at tint_{\rm in}tin​ completes its next run by tin+γm−ζmt_{\rm in}+\gamma_m-\zeta_mtin​+γm​−ζm​ (25).
  2. If it enters QmQ_mQm​ with xp,i(tin)≥γmdpx_{p,i}(t_{\rm in})\ge\gamma_m d_pxp,i​(tin​)≥γm​dp​, that run lowers the backlog: βp,i(tcomplete)≤βp,i(tin)−ζmdpτp,i\beta_{p,i}(t_{\rm complete})\le\beta_{p,i}(t_{\rm in})-\zeta_m d_p\tau_{p,i}βp,i​(tcomplete​)≤βp,i​(tin​)−ζm​dp​τp,i​.
  3. A buffer that enters QmQ_mQm​ at tint_{\rm in}tin​ and stays above max⁡(γmdp,zp,i)\max(\gamma_md_p,z_{p,i})max(γm​dp​,zp,i​) (strictly above zp,iz_{p,i}zp,i​ after tint_{\rm in}tin​) up to t′t't′ has t′−tin≤(1+βp,i(tin)/(ζmdpτp,i))(γm−ζm)t'-t_{\rm in}\le(1+\beta_{p,i}(t_{\rm in})/(\zeta_md_p\tau_{p,i}))(\gamma_m-\zeta_m)t′−tin​≤(1+βp,i​(tin​)/(ζm​dp​τp,i​))(γm​−ζm​).
  4. Any interval on which xp,i≥gp,i:=max⁡(γmdp,zp,i)+γmdpx_{p,i}\ge g_{p,i}:=\max(\gamma_md_p,z_{p,i})+\gamma_md_pxp,i​≥gp,i​:=max(γm​dp​,zp,i​)+γm​dp​ has length at most ap,i+cp,iβp,i(t)a_{p,i}+c_{p,i}\beta_{p,i}(t)ap,i​+cp,i​βp,i​(t).

Significance

The theorem separates two concerns of real-time scheduling. The underlying policy can be tuned for performance (low set-up overhead, short buffers) without any stability analysis; the supervisor guarantees stability under exactly the condition that is necessary for it. The mechanism is distributed: each machine uses only its own buffer levels. With z=0z=0z=0 it enforces FCFS with truncated runs; with large zzz and γ\gammaγ it never intervenes on a policy that is already stable, so the degree of intervention is tunable. Combined with the §III instability examples, it shows that instability of clearing policies is a design defect that a local safeguard removes.

The result is proved in the paper; to our knowledge it has no machine-checked proof. This mission produces a formal model of continuous-flow manufacturing systems with set-up times and runs, a formal definition of the supervisor, and the four parts of Lemma 1 as reusable statements about it. Part 3) is stated with a corrected hypothesis (see Formalization scope).

Difficulty

The underlying policy is arbitrary, so no structure of the trajectory between interventions can be used: the policy may idle on empty buffers, switch at will, and re-select a buffer as soon as its run is truncated. The natural approach of bounding the total work at a machine fails, because work arrives at machine mmm from upstream machines whose behaviour depends on mmm itself through re-entrant routes, so a machine-by-machine argument is circular. A further difficulty is that the supervisor acts only on buffers above their thresholds, so a buffer can be ignored for as long as it sits at or below zp,iz_{p,i}zp,i​; any bound has to account for the time spent below the threshold and for repeated re-entries into QmQ_mQm​, with a set-up paid at each.

Formalization scope

  • Model. Part types Fin P, machines Fin M, buffers Σ p, Fin (n p); paper index iii is Lean index i−1i-1i−1. Time is real with t≥0t\ge0t≥0. Set-up times satisfy δb,b=0\delta_{b,b}=0δb,b​=0: a set-up is paid only on a switch. No transport delays or assembly, as in the paper.
  • Runs. Each machine is always in a run (no idling outside runs); a run is never cut during its set-up; run starts do not accumulate; zero-length runs are allowed. Processing is at rate at most 1/τb1/\tau_b1/τb​ and only in a processing phase of bbb, and at exactly 1/τb1/\tau_b1/τb​ while bbb is nonempty.
  • Queue. Membership of QmQ_mQm​ is determined by the trajectory: not on the current run and level strictly above zbz_bzb​. The FCFS key is the start of the current sojourn; ties, including the initial queue at time 000, are broken arbitrarily, so every initial queue order is covered. A buffer whose run just ended is in QmQ_mQm​ at that instant if its level exceeds zbz_bzb​.
  • Lemma 1. Parts 1)–3) assume, as the page does, that the buffer enters QmQ_mQm​ at tint_{\rm in}tin​. Part 3) adds xp,i>zp,ix_{p,i}>z_{p,i}xp,i​>zp,i​ on (tin,t′](t_{\rm in},t'](tin​,t′]: with the printed non-strict hypothesis the buffer can sit at exactly zp,iz_{p,i}zp,i​, never be re-queued, and wait arbitrarily long. In 4), cp,ic_{p,i}cp,i​ is (γm−ζm)/(ζmdpτp,i)(\gamma_m-\zeta_m)/(\zeta_md_p\tau_{p,i})(γm​−ζm​)/(ζm​dp​τp,i​).
  • Ruled out. The base policy is not restricted to clearing, CAF or any fixed rule, the system is not restricted to few machines or acyclic routes, and the hypothesis of the goal is (24), not ζm>0\zeta_m>0ζm​>0. A non-vacuity witness (one machine, one buffer) shows the class of supervised trajectories is nonempty.
  • Reusable. The trajectory model (runs, set-ups, processing law) is the same as in the other missions of this series and applies to any distributed scheduling policy with set-ups.

Contributions welcome: proofs of the Lemma 1 parts, and lemmas on the model (Lipschitz continuity of levels, monotonicity of a buffer's level while it is not processed).

Selected references

  • P. R. Kumar and T. I. Seidman, Dynamic instabilities and stabilization methods in distributed real-time scheduling of manufacturing systems, IEEE Trans. Automat. Control 35(3), 289–298, 1990. https://doi.org/10.1109/9.50339
  • J. R. Perkins and P. R. Kumar, Stable, distributed, real-time scheduling of flexible manufacturing/assembly/disassembly systems, IEEE Trans. Automat. Control 34(2), 139–148, 1989. https://doi.org/10.1109/9.21085
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Control TheoryDynamical SystemsOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Homogeneous Approximation, Recursive Observer Design, and Output Feedback: Global Asymptotic Stabilization of a Chain of Integrators by a Homogeneous-in-the-Bi-Limit Output FeedbackResearch Paper

Motivation

Many nonlinear control systems behave like a chain of integrators, x˙1=x2,…,x˙n=u\dot x_1=x_2,\dots,\dot x_n=ux˙1​=x2​,…,x˙n​=u, with additional terms that are small either near the origin or far from it. Designs based on weighted homogeneity handle such systems by making the closed loop invariant under a dilation, which gives robustness to perturbations that are dominated by the homogeneous part (Rosier, Homogeneous Lyapunov function for homogeneous continuous vector field, Systems & Control Letters, 1992, doi:10.1016/0167-6911(92)90078-7). A single homogeneous approximation, however, describes the system only at one scale. A perturbation that is negligible near the origin may dominate at infinity, and a design tuned to the origin can then fail globally.

Andrieu, Praly and Astolfi (arXiv:0903.0298v1; SIAM J. Control Optim., 2008, doi:10.1137/060675861) introduce homogeneity in the bi-limit: a function or vector field has one homogeneous approximation near the origin and another, possibly with different weights and degree, at infinity. They develop the basic calculus of this notion, a converse Lyapunov theorem for it, a recursive observer and a recursive state feedback for the chain of integrators, and combine them into a global output feedback. This mission formalizes that output-feedback result and the chain of results it rests on.

Setting

For a weight r=(r1,…,rn)r=(r_1,\dots,r_n)r=(r1​,…,rn​) with all ri>0r_i>0ri​>0 and λ>0\lambda>0λ>0, the dilation is λr⋄x=(λr1x1,…,λrnxn)\lambda^r\diamond x=(\lambda^{r_1}x_1,\dots,\lambda^{r_n}x_n)λr⋄x=(λr1​x1​,…,λrn​xn​). A continuous function ϕ:Rn→R\phi:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb Rϕ:Rn→R is homogeneous in the 0-limit with triple (r0,d0,ϕ0)(r_0,d_0,\phi_0)(r0​,d0​,ϕ0​), degree d0≥0d_0\ge0d0​≥0, if ϕ0\phi_0ϕ0​ is continuous and not identically zero and, for every compact C⊆Rn∖{0}C\subseteq\mathbb R^n\setminus\{0\}C⊆Rn∖{0} and every ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0, there is λ0>0\lambda_0>0λ0​>0 such that

max⁡x∈C∣ϕ(λr0⋄x)λd0−ϕ0(x)∣≤εfor all λ∈(0,λ0].\max_{x\in C}\left|\frac{\phi(\lambda^{r_0}\diamond x)}{\lambda^{d_0}}-\phi_0(x)\right|\le\varepsilon\qquad\text{for all }\lambda\in(0,\lambda_0].x∈Cmax​​λd0​ϕ(λr0​⋄x)​−ϕ0​(x)​≤εfor all λ∈(0,λ0​].

Homogeneity in the ∞-limit with triple (r∞,d∞,ϕ∞)(r_\infty,d_\infty,\phi_\infty)(r∞​,d∞​,ϕ∞​) is the same statement for all λ≥λ∞\lambda\ge\lambda_\inftyλ≥λ∞​. A vector field f=(f1,…,fn)f=(f_1,\dots,f_n)f=(f1​,…,fn​) is homogeneous with triple (r,d,f0)(r,\mathfrak d,f_0)(r,d,f0​), d∈R\mathfrak d\in\mathbb Rd∈R, when each fif_ifi​ is homogeneous with triple (r,d+ri,f0,i)(r,\mathfrak d+r_i,f_{0,i})(r,d+ri​,f0,i​) and d+ri≥0\mathfrak d+r_i\ge0d+ri​≥0. Bi-limit means both at once.

For the chain of integrators, Snx=(x2,…,xn,0)TS_n x=(x_2,\dots,x_n,0)^TSn​x=(x2​,…,xn​,0)T and Bn=(0,…,0,1)TB_n=(0,\dots,0,1)^TBn​=(0,…,0,1)T. Given degrees d0,d∞∈(−1,1n−1)\mathfrak d_0,\mathfrak d_\infty\in(-1,\frac1{n-1})d0​,d∞​∈(−1,n−11​), the weights are

r0,i=1−d0(n−i),r∞,i=1−d∞(n−i),i=1,…,n.r_{0,i}=1-\mathfrak d_0(n-i),\qquad r_{\infty,i}=1-\mathfrak d_\infty(n-i),\qquad i=1,\dots,n .r0,i​=1−d0​(n−i),r∞,i​=1−d∞​(n−i),i=1,…,n.

The output feedback studied is

x˙=Snx+Bnu,y=x1,X^˙n=L(SnX^n+Bnϕn(X^n)+K1(x1−x^1)),u=Lnϕn(X^n),\dot x=S_nx+B_nu,\quad y=x_1,\qquad \dot{\hat{\mathfrak X}}_n=L\bigl(S_n\hat{\mathfrak X}_n+B_n\phi_n(\hat{\mathfrak X}_n)+K_1(x_1-\hat x_1)\bigr),\quad u=L^n\phi_n(\hat{\mathfrak X}_n),x˙=Sn​x+Bn​u,y=x1​,X^˙n​=L(Sn​X^n​+Bn​ϕn​(X^n​)+K1​(x1​−x^1​)),u=Lnϕn​(X^n​),

with a gain L>0L>0L>0, a state feedback ϕn:Rn→R\phi_n:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb Rϕn​:Rn→R and an output-injection vector field K1:Rn→RnK_1:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb R^nK1​:Rn→Rn, where K1(s)K_1(s)K1​(s) means K1(s,0,…,0)K_1(s,0,\dots,0)K1​(s,0,…,0). Its homogeneous approximations are the same closed loop with (ϕn,0,K1,0)(\phi_{n,0},K_{1,0})(ϕn,0​,K1,0​) and with (ϕn,∞,K1,∞)(\phi_{n,\infty},K_{1,\infty})(ϕn,∞​,K1,∞​) in place of (ϕn,K1)(\phi_n,K_1)(ϕn​,K1​).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5.1

For n≥2n\ge2n≥2 and d0,d∞∈(−1,1n−1)\mathfrak d_0,\mathfrak d_\infty\in(-1,\frac1{n-1})d0​,d∞​∈(−1,n−11​) there exist ϕn\phi_nϕn​, homogeneous in the bi-limit with triples (r0,1+d0,ϕn,0)(r_0,1+\mathfrak d_0,\phi_{n,0})(r0​,1+d0​,ϕn,0​) and (r∞,1+d∞,ϕn,∞)(r_\infty,1+\mathfrak d_\infty,\phi_{n,\infty})(r∞​,1+d∞​,ϕn,∞​), and K1K_1K1​, homogeneous in the bi-limit with triples (r0,d0,K1,0)(r_0,\mathfrak d_0,K_{1,0})(r0​,d0​,K1,0​) and (r∞,d∞,K1,∞)(r_\infty,\mathfrak d_\infty,K_{1,\infty})(r∞​,d∞​,K1,∞​), such that

∀L>0:0∈R2n is globally asymptotically stable for the closed loop and for both of its homogeneous approximations.\forall L>0:\quad 0\in\mathbb R^{2n}\text{ is globally asymptotically stable for the closed loop and for both of its homogeneous approximations.}∀L>0:0∈R2n is globally asymptotically stable for the closed loop and for both of its homogeneous approximations.

The pair (ϕn,K1)(\phi_n,K_1)(ϕn​,K1​) is fixed before LLL. No constant appears in the goal.

Milestones

  1. Proposition 2.10 (composition) and Proposition 2.12 (integration along a coordinate) preserve homogeneity in the limit.
  2. Lemma 2.13: for homogeneous η\etaη and γ≥0\gamma\ge0γ≥0 with η<0\eta<0η<0 where γ=0\gamma=0γ=0, η−cγ<0\eta-c\gamma<0η−cγ<0 off the origin for all large ccc, simultaneously for both approximations.
  3. Theorem 2.20: a converse Lyapunov theorem, giving a C1C^1C1 proper Lyapunov function whose gradient is homogeneous in the bi-limit.
  4. Theorem 3.1 and display (3.12): the recursive observer, an output injection K1K_1K1​ making E˙=SnE+K1(e1)\dot E=S_nE+K_1(e_1)E˙=Sn​E+K1​(e1​) and its approximations globally asymptotically stable.
  5. Theorem 4.1 and display (4.9): the recursive state feedback, a ϕn\phi_nϕn​ making X˙=SnX+Bnϕn(X)\dot{\mathfrak X}=S_n\mathfrak X+B_n\phi_n(\mathfrak X)X˙=Sn​X+Bn​ϕn​(X) and its approximations globally asymptotically stable.

Significance

The theorem gives a single dynamic output feedback for the chain of integrators that is homogeneous with prescribed degrees near the origin and at infinity, and that stabilizes globally for every gain L>0L>0L>0. Because the degrees at the two ends are independent, the same design can be matched to perturbations of different orders at small and large amplitudes; the paper derives from it output-feedback stabilizers for systems in feedback and feedforward form (Corollaries 5.2 and 5.3), which are outside this mission. The converse Lyapunov theorem (Theorem 2.20) and the key lemma (Lemma 2.13) are general tools for any vector field homogeneous in the bi-limit.

The results are proved in the paper; none of them, nor the notion of homogeneity in the bi-limit, has a machine-checked proof. The platform has a definition of global asymptotic stability for continuous vector fields (from the series on Chitour, Ushirobira, Efimov and Perruquetti's prescribed-time stabilization) and Mathlib has the needed analysis, but there is no converse Lyapunov theorem and no theory of weighted homogeneous vector fields. A complete formalization would supply both.

Difficulty

Lyapunov arguments for homogeneous systems usually compare a function with its homogeneous approximation on the unit sphere and then scale. With homogeneity in the bi-limit the comparison holds only for small or for large dilation parameters, with no control at intermediate scales, and the two approximations have different weights, so no single dilation brings the whole space to a compact set. Each statement has to hold for the system and for both approximations at once. Theorem 2.20 additionally requires a converse Lyapunov theorem for continuous, non-Lipschitz vector fields whose solutions need not be unique, so a flow map is not available. Finally, the gain LLL in the goal is arbitrary: an argument that only works for LLL large enough proves a weaker statement.

Formalization scope

Points of Rn\mathbb R^nRn are functions Fin n → ℝ, with the paper's coordinate xix_ixi​ at index i−1i-1i−1; the closed loop lives on Fin (n + n) → ℝ with xxx first and X^n\hat{\mathfrak X}_nX^n​ second. Real powers are Real.rpow; the signed power is wr=sign⁡(w)∣w∣rw^r=\operatorname{sign}(w)|w|^rwr=sign(w)∣w∣r. Every clause of Definitions 2.1, 2.3 and 2.5 is kept: positive weights, nonnegative function degrees, continuity, approximating functions not identically zero, uniformity on compact subsets of Rn∖{0}\mathbb R^n\setminus\{0\}Rn∖{0}. Dropping any of them makes the goal weaker than the paper's.

Global asymptotic stability reuses the published ChitourPrescribedTime.FixedTime.GloballyAsymptoticallyStable on the Euclidean space, applied to the time-invariant field: the origin is an equilibrium, every initial state has a solution on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), and stability and uniform attractivity hold for every solution. The mission adds that no solution escapes to infinity in finite time, so that every solution is covered; for continuous autonomous fields this is the textbook notion. Positive and negative definiteness, properness (V→∞V\to\inftyV→∞ along the cocompact filter), C1C^1C1 and partial derivatives (Fréchet derivative on a basis vector) are defined in the mission's definition files.

Corrections and readings, each disclosed in the item concerned:

  • Proposition 2.10 is false as printed. The composite approximation ζ0∘ϕ0\zeta_0\circ\phi_0ζ0​∘ϕ0​ can vanish identically, and in the ∞-limit a degree-0 outer function fails. Both extra hypotheses are added.
  • (5.2) prints K1(x1−x^1)K_1(x_1-\hat x_1)K1​(x1​−x^1​) while (3.3) and (5.9) use x^1−x1\hat x_1-x_1x^1​−x1​. The goal keeps the printed sign; since K1K_1K1​ is existential, the two readings are equivalent.
  • In Theorem 3.1 the hypothesis "GAS for these systems" covers (3.5) and both approximations, as the proof uses. In Theorem 4.1 the implicit ψi0,ψi∞\psi_{i0},\psi_{i\infty}ψi0​,ψi∞​ are existential C1C^1C1 functions, and αi+1>1\alpha_{i+1}>1αi+1​>1 is kept as printed. (4.4) and (4.9) lack the time-derivative dots.

A formalization in which the closed loop is replaced by its linearization, the homogeneity predicate is weakened to pointwise convergence, or the quantifier on LLL is moved before ϕn\phi_nϕn​ and K1K_1K1​, proves a different statement and does not close the goal. Contributions welcome: a library of weighted dilations and homogeneous functions, the converse Lyapunov theorem, and proofs of the milestones in any order.

Selected references

  • V. Andrieu, L. Praly, A. Astolfi, Homogeneous Approximation, Recursive Observer Design, and Output Feedback, arXiv:0903.0298v1, 2009 (SIAM J. Control Optim. 47(4), 2008). https://arxiv.org/abs/0903.0298
  • L. Rosier, Homogeneous Lyapunov function for homogeneous continuous vector field, Systems & Control Letters 19(6), 1992. https://doi.org/10.1016/0167-6911(92)90078-7
  • A. Bacciotti, L. Rosier, Liapunov Functions and Stability in Control Theory, Springer, 2nd ed., 2005. https://doi.org/10.1007/b139028
12 thms1 active userReviewed
CombinatoricsGraph TheoryProbability+1·Captain: mikedeng1

Inapproximability of Edge-Disjoint Paths and Low Congestion Routing on Undirected Graphs: A Random Hypergraph Instance Gives the Flow Relaxation an Integrality Gap of β₁/(4c) at Congestion c − 1Research Paper

Motivation

In the edge-disjoint paths problem (EDP) one is given an undirected graph and a list of source–sink pairs, and asks how many pairs can be connected simultaneously by paths that share no edge. Its relaxation EDP with congestion (EDPwC) allows every edge to carry up to a fixed number of paths. Both are central problems of network routing and of approximation algorithms, and the standard algorithmic tool for them is the multicommodity flow relaxation: a linear program that may split each pair's unit of demand fractionally over many paths. Rounding this LP is how most approximation algorithms for routing work, so the ratio between its optimum and the best integral routing, the integrality gap, bounds what any LP-based algorithm can achieve.

Without congestion the gap of this relaxation can be as large as Ω(V)\Omega(\sqrt V)Ω(V​) (Chekuri–Khanna–Shepherd 2006), and the question is how much a small congestion helps. Andrews, Chuzhoy, Guruswami, Khanna, Talwar and Zhang (Combinatorica 2010) proved hardness of approximation for EDPwC (their Theorems 1 and 2) and, independently and unconditionally, that the gap of the relaxation remains (log⁡V)Ω(1/c)(\log V)^{\Omega(1/c)}(logV)Ω(1/c) even when the integral solution may use congestion c−1c-1c−1 (their Theorem 5). In particular, for every fixed integer iii the gap between (1/i)(1/i)(1/i)-integral and fractional multicommodity flow in undirected graphs is superconstant. This mission formalizes Theorem 5 for EDPwC.

Setting

Fix integers n≥1n\ge1n≥1 and c≥2c\ge2c≥2. Write log⁡\loglog for log⁡2\log_2log2​ and ln⁡\lnln for the natural logarithm, and set

β1=14(log⁡n150(log⁡log⁡n)2)1/c,β2=6(2β1)c−1ln⁡β1.\beta_1=\frac14\Big(\frac{\log n}{150(\log\log n)^2}\Big)^{1/c},\qquad \beta_2=6(2\beta_1)^{c-1}\ln\beta_1 .β1​=41​(150(loglogn)2logn​)1/c,β2​=6(2β1​)c−1lnβ1​.

A random ccc-uniform hypergraph HHH on the vertex set {0,…,n−1}\{0,\dots,n-1\}{0,…,n−1} has m=⌊β2n⌋m=\lfloor\beta_2 n\rfloorm=⌊β2​n⌋ hyperedges h0,…,hm−1h_0,\dots,h_{m-1}h0​,…,hm−1​, chosen independently, each uniformly among the ccc-element subsets of the vertices.

From HHH one builds a graph G=G(H)G=G(H)G=G(H). For every hyperedge hih_ihi​ it has two vertices ℓi,ri\ell_i,r_iℓi​,ri​ joined by a special edge; for every vertex vvv of HHH it has a source s(v)s(v)s(v) and a sink t(v)t(v)t(v). If vvv lies in the hyperedges hi1,…,hikh_{i_1},\dots,h_{i_k}hi1​​,…,hik​​ with i1<⋯<iki_1<\dots<i_ki1​<⋯<ik​, the regular edges (s(v),ℓi1)(s(v),\ell_{i_1})(s(v),ℓi1​​), (rij,ℓij+1)(r_{i_j},\ell_{i_{j+1}})(rij​​,ℓij+1​​) for 1≤j<k1\le j<k1≤j<k, and (rik,t(v))(r_{i_k},t(v))(rik​​,t(v)) are added. The canonical path of vvv is P(v)=(s(v),ℓi1,ri1,…,ℓik,rik,t(v))P(v)=(s(v),\ell_{i_1},r_{i_1},\dots,\ell_{i_k},r_{i_k},t(v))P(v)=(s(v),ℓi1​​,ri1​​,…,ℓik​​,rik​​,t(v)); it crosses the special edge of every hyperedge containing vvv. The EDP instance has one pair (s(v),t(v))(s(v),t(v))(s(v),t(v)) for each vvv.

A feasible fractional solution puts flow f(P)∈[0,1]f(P)\in[0,1]f(P)∈[0,1] on s(v)s(v)s(v)–t(v)t(v)t(v) paths PPP, with routed amount xv=∑Pf(P)≤1x_v=\sum_P f(P)\le1xv​=∑P​f(P)≤1 for each pair and at most one unit of flow through each edge; its value is ∑vxv\sum_v x_v∑v​xv​. An integral routing with congestion at most c−1c-1c−1 connects a set of pairs, each by one path, so that every edge lies on at most c−1c-1c−1 of these paths; its value is the number of connected pairs.

The analysis uses three events of HHH: E1\mathcal E_1E1​, that some set of n/β1n/\beta_1n/β1​ vertices contains no hyperedge; E2\mathcal E_2E2​, that more than n/β1n/\beta_1n/β1​ vertices lie in more than 10β2c10\beta_2c10β2​c hyperedges; and E3(g)\mathcal E_3(g)E3​(g), that the graph G′G'G′ obtained from GGG by contracting every special edge has more than (6β2c2)g+1(6\beta_2c^2)^{g+1}(6β2​c2)g+1 cycles of length at most ggg.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5 for EDPwC, in the explicit form of Section 2

There are absolute constants α>0\alpha>0α>0 and N0N_0N0​ such that for all n≥N0n\ge N_0n≥N0​ and all integers ccc with 2≤c≤αlog⁡log⁡n/log⁡log⁡log⁡n2\le c\le\alpha\log\log n/\log\log\log n2≤c≤αloglogn/logloglogn some hypergraph HHH as above satisfies

∃ fractional solution of G(H) of value ncandevery congestion-(c−1) routing of G(H) routes ≤4nβ1 pairs,\exists\ \text{fractional solution of } G(H)\ \text{of value } \frac nc\qquad\text{and}\qquad \text{every congestion-}(c-1)\text{ routing of } G(H)\ \text{routes}\ \le\frac{4n}{\beta_1}\ \text{pairs},∃ fractional solution of G(H) of value cn​andevery congestion-(c−1) routing of G(H) routes ≤β1​4n​ pairs,

so the integrality gap is at least β1/(4c)\beta_1/(4c)β1​/(4c). The paper's Theorem 5 states this as Ω(1c(log⁡V/(log⁡log⁡V)2)1/(c+1))\Omega\big(\frac1{c}(\log V/(\log\log V)^2)^{1/(c+1)}\big)Ω(c1​(logV/(loglogV)2)1/(c+1)) for congestion ccc and VVV vertices; the goal keeps the paper's own Section 2 parameters, which fix the instance and leave the constants α,N0\alpha,N_0α,N0​ open.

Milestones

Lemma 6, Lemma 7 and Lemma 8 (Pr⁡[E1],Pr⁡[E2],Pr⁡[E3(g)]≤14\Pr[\mathcal E_1],\Pr[\mathcal E_2],\Pr[\mathcal E_3(g)]\le\frac14Pr[E1​],Pr[E2​],Pr[E3​(g)]≤41​); the joint good event of Section 2.4; the fractional solution of value n/cn/cn/c; and the three bounds of the gap analysis, ∣P1∣≤n/β1|\mathcal P_1|\le n/\beta_1∣P1​∣≤n/β1​ (canonical paths), ∣P2∣≤n/β1|\mathcal P_2|\le n/\beta_1∣P2​∣≤n/β1​ (long non-canonical paths), ∣P3∣≤n/β1+2gc(6β2c2)2g+2|\mathcal P_3|\le n/\beta_1+2gc(6\beta_2c^2)^{2g+2}∣P3​∣≤n/β1​+2gc(6β2​c2)2g+2 (short non-canonical paths), combined into ∣P′∣≤4n/β1|\mathcal P'|\le4n/\beta_1∣P′∣≤4n/β1​.

Significance

The result shows that the multicommodity flow relaxation cannot certify a constant-factor approximation for undirected EDPwC with any constant congestion: against integral solutions of congestion c−1c-1c−1 its gap is at least (log⁡V)Ω(1/c)(\log V)^{\Omega(1/c)}(logV)Ω(1/c). Any algorithm that compares its output with this LP inherits the bound. It complements the paper's hardness results, which hold only under a complexity assumption. The instance is a short explicit construction from a random hypergraph, so the theorem is also a statement in probabilistic combinatorics: random sparse uniform hypergraphs are, with constant probability, simultaneously "covering" (no large hyperedge-free set), of bounded degree, and nearly free of short cycles.

The result is proved in the paper; to our knowledge it has no machine-checked proof. The mission produces one: a formal model of the path LP and of congestion-bounded integral routings on simple graphs, reusable for other routing gaps; a formal random-hypergraph model with first-moment and Chernoff-type estimates; and the deterministic gap analysis. Variants with better constants, or the stronger statement that at least a quarter of all hypergraphs work, are welcome as additional results.

Difficulty

The fractional side and the bound on canonical routings are short. The difficulty lies in two places. First, Lemma 8 bounds the expected number of short cycles of G′G'G′; the adjacency of G′G'G′ depends on all hyperedges at once (consecutiveness along each vertex's sequence), and the obvious estimate through the intersection graph of HHH fails, because many hyperedges through a common vertex form a clique there. What keeps the count small is the order structure of each vertex's hyperedge sequence, which the intersection graph forgets. Second, the bound on short non-canonical paths requires turning two distinct routing paths of a pair into a short cycle of the contracted graph and charging it with the congestion constraint. Finally, the closing estimate 2gc(6β2c2)2g+2≤n/β12gc(6\beta_2c^2)^{2g+2}\le n/\beta_12gc(6β2​c2)2g+2≤n/β1​ holds only for large nnn in the stated range of ccc, and the printed chain for it is not literally correct, so the asymptotics have to be done afresh.

Formalization scope

Vertices of HHH are Fin n, hyperedges are indexed by Fin m with m=⌊β2n⌋m=\lfloor\beta_2n\rfloorm=⌊β2​n⌋, and HHH is an element of Fin m → {s : Finset (Fin n) // s.card = c}; probabilities are normalized counts over this finite set (uniform measure, which is independence of the hyperedges). The conventions are:

  • log⁡=log⁡2\log=\log_2log=log2​ and ln⁡\lnln is natural; β1\beta_1β1​ uses a real 1/c1/c1/c-th power.
  • The paper's integers β2n\beta_2nβ2​n, n/β1n/\beta_1n/β1​ (bad-set size) and g=3β1β2c2g=3\beta_1\beta_2c^2g=3β1​β2​c2 are ⌊β2n⌋\lfloor\beta_2n\rfloor⌊β2​n⌋, ⌈n/β1⌉\lceil n/\beta_1\rceil⌈n/β1​⌉ and ⌈3β1β2c2⌉\lceil3\beta_1\beta_2c^2\rceil⌈3β1​β2​c2⌉; the thresholds n/β1n/\beta_1n/β1​, 4n/β14n/\beta_14n/β1​, 10β2c10\beta_2c10β2​c, (6β2c2)g+1(6\beta_2c^2)^{g+1}(6β2​c2)g+1 stay real.
  • "For sufficiently large nnn" and c≤O(log⁡log⁡n/log⁡log⁡log⁡n)c\le O(\log\log n/\log\log\log n)c≤O(loglogn/logloglogn) become absolute constants N0N_0N0​ and α\alphaα, quantified before nnn and ccc. Lemma 8 and the deterministic bounds carry instead the explicit inequalities on β1,β2\beta_1,\beta_2β1​,β2​ their arguments use.
  • G(H)G(H)G(H) is a simple graph (coinciding regular edges are one edge). A vertex in no hyperedge gets the edge (s(v),t(v))(s(v),t(v))(s(v),t(v)), the k=0k=0k=0 case of its canonical path; the page leaves this case out.
  • KgK_gKg​ counts cycles of G′G'G′, each once as an edge set; the paper's definition says "in GGG", its proof and use say G′G'G′.
  • Routing paths are paths (no repeated vertex); lengths count edges of G(H)G(H)G(H); canonicity is equality of vertex sequences.

The goal cannot be met by an unrelated graph: the instance must be G(H)G(H)G(H) for a hypergraph with exactly ⌊β2n⌋\lfloor\beta_2n\rfloor⌊β2​n⌋ hyperedges of size ccc on nnn vertices, the fractional solution must respect xv≤1x_v\le1xv​≤1 and capacity 111, and the integral bound is over all routings of congestion c−1c-1c−1.

Not in scope: the ANFwC half of Theorem 5, the remark on a superconstant gap at c=Θ(log⁡log⁡V/(log⁡log⁡log⁡V)2)c=\Theta(\log\log V/(\log\log\log V)^2)c=Θ(loglogV/(logloglogV)2), and the hardness results of Sections 3–5 (Theorems 1 and 2, Corollaries 3 and 4).

A complete development needs Chernoff and Markov bounds for counting measures, binomial-coefficient estimates, cycle extraction from two distinct paths in a simple graph, and the asymptotic estimates for β1,β2\beta_1,\beta_2β1​,β2​. The routing and LP definitions and the cycle-extraction lemma are reusable beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • M. Andrews, J. Chuzhoy, V. Guruswami, S. Khanna, K. Talwar, L. Zhang, Inapproximability of Edge-Disjoint Paths and Low Congestion Routing on Undirected Graphs, Combinatorica 30(5), 485–520, 2010. https://doi.org/10.1007/s00493-010-2455-9
  • C. Chekuri, S. Khanna, F. B. Shepherd, An O(n)O(\sqrt n)O(n​) approximation and integrality gap for disjoint paths and unsplittable flow, Theory of Computing 2, 137–146, 2006. https://doi.org/10.4086/toc.2006.v002a007
12 thms1 active userReviewed
ProbabilityStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Simulation Output Analysis Using Standardized Time Series 2: Every STS Interval Has liminf n^{1/2} E Lₙ ≥ 2σΦ⁻¹(1 − δ/2)Research Paper

Why expected interval length matters

A simulation run often estimates a steady-state mean without producing independent observations. A confidence interval must account for dependence in the output, and the relevant variance constant may be unknown. Standardized time series (STS) methods use the shape of an integrated output path to cancel that constant rather than estimating it separately. The resulting interval can be computed from one run, but its length can vary substantially with the chosen standardizing functional. Glynn and Iglehart introduced a common functional framework for these methods and asked how short their expected intervals can be as the run grows. Their 1990 paper identifies a universal lower bound.

The comparison is operational. A shorter confidence interval conveys a more precise estimate at the same nominal coverage. The authors also compare STS with procedures that consistently estimate the variance constant. They state that the lower bound is attained by the latter procedures and approached, but not attained, by STS intervals. The present mission isolates the bound for STS itself, Corollary 4.16. It does not make the claim that a particular STS rule attains it. This distinction follows the paper's introduction and §4.

The stochastic setting

Let Y(t)Y(t)Y(t) be a real simulation output process for t≥0t\ge0t≥0. Its integrated average path at run length nnn is Y‾n(t)=n−1∫0ntY(s) ds\overline Y_n(t)=n^{-1}\int_0^{nt}Y(s)\,dsYn​(t)=n−1∫0nt​Y(s)ds for 0≤t≤10\le t\le10≤t≤1. The unknown steady-state mean is μ\muμ. The paper assumes a functional central limit theorem in the space C[0,1]C[0,1]C[0,1] of continuous real paths:

Xn(t):=n(Y‾n(t)−μt) ⇒ σB(t),σ>0,X_n(t):=\sqrt n\bigl(\overline Y_n(t)-\mu t\bigr) \ \Rightarrow\ \sigma B(t),\qquad \sigma>0,Xn​(t):=n​(Yn​(t)−μt) ⇒ σB(t),σ>0,

where BBB is standard Brownian motion. Convergence is weak convergence of random continuous paths in the uniform topology. This is Assumption (2.1), rather than a claim that every output process satisfies it. The paper lists several classes of processes for which such a theorem is available under further conditions (§2, pp. 2–3).

An STS scale functional g:C[0,1]→Rg:C[0,1]\to\mathbb Rg:C[0,1]→R belongs to M\mathcal MM when it is measurable, positively homogeneous, unchanged by subtracting any multiple of the identity path k(t)=tk(t)=tk(t)=t, positive at BBB almost surely, and continuous at BBB almost surely. The last two conditions ensure that the Brownian ratio is a meaningful distributional limit. The paper also describes these functionals through the bridge map (Γx)(t)=x(t)−tx(1)(\Gamma x)(t)=x(t)-t x(1)(Γx)(t)=x(t)−tx(1): a member of M\mathcal MM can be written as b∘Γb\circ\Gammab∘Γ for a suitable bbb. Thus the scale is determined by a Brownian bridge while the endpoint B(1)B(1)B(1) is independent of it (Propositions 2.7–2.8).

Define H(x)=P{B(1)/g(B)≤x}H(x)=P\{B(1)/g(B)\le x\}H(x)=P{B(1)/g(B)≤x}. For a confidence level 1−δ1-\delta1−δ, choose endpoints α,β\alpha,\betaα,β with H(β)−H(α)=1−δH(\beta)-H(\alpha)=1-\deltaH(β)−H(α)=1−δ. The STS confidence interval from equation (2.10) has endpoints Y‾n(1)−g(Y‾n)β\overline Y_n(1)-g(\overline Y_n)\betaYn​(1)−g(Yn​)β and Y‾n(1)−g(Y‾n)α\overline Y_n(1)-g(\overline Y_n)\alphaYn​(1)−g(Yn​)α. Its length is Ln=g(Y‾n)(β−α)L_n=g(\overline Y_n)(\beta-\alpha)Ln​=g(Yn​)(β−α). Here δ\deltaδ lies strictly between zero and one; the endpoint equation is part of the construction, not an arbitrary choice.

Formalization target

The goal is Corollary 4.16 for every nonnegative g∈Mg\in\mathcal Mg∈M under Assumption (2.1). Write Φ\PhiΦ for the standard normal distribution function and p=Φ−1(1−δ/2)p=\Phi^{-1}(1-\delta/2)p=Φ−1(1−δ/2). Then

lim inf⁡n→∞n E[Ln] ≥ 2σp=2σΦ−1(1−δ/2).\liminf_{n\to\infty}\sqrt n\,E[L_n] \ \ge\ 2\sigma p =2\sigma\Phi^{-1}(1-\delta/2).n→∞liminf​n​E[Ln​] ≥ 2σp=2σΦ−1(1−δ/2).

The expectation and liminf admit +∞+\infty+∞. The statement does not impose an integrability assumption that would remove that case. It quantifies over every admissible STS functional and every interval whose endpoints have the specified Brownian confidence mass (Corollary 4.16, p. 12).

Three substantial targets precede the corollary. Proposition 4.1(a) relates scaled expected length to σE[g(B)](β−α)\sigma E[g(B)](\beta-\alpha)σE[g(B)](β−α). Proposition 4.3 says a symmetric choice of α,β\alpha,\betaα,β minimizes β−α\beta-\alphaβ−α. Theorem 4.8 gives E[g(B)]Φg−1(1−δ/2)≥Φ−1(1−δ/2)E[g(B)]\Phi^{-1}_g(1-\delta/2)\ge\Phi^{-1}(1-\delta/2)E[g(B)]Φg−1​(1−δ/2)≥Φ−1(1−δ/2), where Φg−1\Phi^{-1}_gΦg−1​ denotes the quantile of HHH. The milestone list also includes the cited Brownian independence, mixture distribution, scale invariance, and continuous mapping statements that put these targets in context.

What the bound establishes

The corollary supplies a benchmark for the asymptotic expected length of any interval in this STS class. A proposed standardizing functional cannot beat the normal-quantile constant while retaining the stated functional limit and confidence construction. It also identifies the quantity against which the paper's other interval procedures can be compared. The bound applies uniformly to the class M\mathcal MM, not to a chosen batch size or a particular form of ggg (Glynn–Iglehart 1990, §4).

The mathematical result has been proved in the source paper. This mission supplies formal statements and their shared definitions as proof targets; it does not claim that their Lean proofs already exist. A complete development would formalize the known arguments for the milestones and corollary, including the Brownian path representation, weak convergence, quantile properties, and expectation inequalities. Those components could be reused in other work on simulation output analysis and ratios of weakly convergent processes.

Where the formal proof is demanding

Weak convergence alone does not imply convergence of expectations. In particular, a continuous mapping limit for g(Xn)g(X_n)g(Xn​) cannot simply be integrated as an ordinary finite real expectation when the family is not uniformly integrable. Proposition 4.1(a) asks only for a lower bound, and its statement must still account for E[g(B)]=+∞E[g(B)]=+\inftyE[g(B)]=+∞. This is why the goal is expressed with a liminf and extended nonnegative expectations rather than a real-valued limit. A separate difficulty is that the interval width depends jointly on a distributional scale and a choice of two quantiles. Bounding either one in isolation does not state the corollary.

Formalization scope and conventions

Paths are Mathlib's C([0,1],R)C([0,1],\mathbb R)C([0,1],R) with its uniform metric and Borel sigma algebra. A standard Brownian motion is a measurable random continuous path agreeing with an R≥0\mathbb R_{\ge0}R≥0​-indexed real Brownian motion on [0,1][0,1][0,1]. The paper's discontinuity set D(g)D(g)D(g) is the set where ggg is not continuous. Assumption (2.1) includes joint measurability of YYY and finite-interval pathwise integrability so that each integrated average is defined. The path Y‾n\overline Y_nYn​ is supplied together with its defining integral equation, which determines it pointwise. Its values are not free parameters.

Indices nnn are natural numbers. At n=0n=0n=0, the average uses Lean's total division and is zero; this initial value does not affect an asymptotic statement. The positive Brownian scale σ\sigmaσ is finite. The parameters satisfy 0<δ<10<\delta<10<δ<1, and H(β)−H(α)=1−δH(\beta)-H(\alpha)=1-\deltaH(β)−H(α)=1−δ. The normal and STS quantiles appear as real parameters pinned by their distribution-function equations, avoiding an unbounded or empty real infimum. Expected nonnegative lengths and scales are integrals valued in R≥0∪{+∞}\mathbb R_{\ge0}\cup\{+\infty\}R≥0​∪{+∞}. The class N\mathcal NN explicitly requires measurability of bbb, the standing convention needed for its equality with M\mathcal MM.

The corollary retains the entire class M\mathcal MM and Assumption (2.1), with g≥0g\ge0g≥0 on all continuous paths. It cannot be replaced by a statement about a single easy functional or by assuming the bound on an auxiliary criterion. Useful contributions include the Brownian bridge independence theorem, the normal scale-mixture identity, distribution-function regularity, and the asymptotic expectation result.

Selected references

  • P. W. Glynn and D. L. Iglehart, Simulation output analysis using standardized time series, Mathematics of Operations Research 15(1):1–16, 1990. DOI: 10.1287/moor.15.1.1.
11 thms1 active userReviewed
ProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Poisson Arrivals See Time Averages: Under Lack of Anticipation, the Fraction of Time in B Converges a.s. iff the Fraction of Arrivals Finding B Does, to the Same LimitResearch Paper

Why arrival averages and time averages agree

Queueing analysis constantly moves between two kinds of long-run averages: the fraction of time a system spends in some set of states, and the fraction of arriving customers who find it there. Waiting-time formulas for the M/G/1 queue, blocking probabilities in loss systems and many decomposition arguments rest on the claim that, when arrivals form a Poisson process, the two coincide. This property is known as PASTA, Poisson Arrivals See Time Averages. It is used throughout queueing theory, inventory theory and the analysis of communication networks, usually without proof.

Before 1982 the property had been proved under strong extra structure:

  • Strauch (1970) proved an instantaneous version, at a fixed time point, which does not by itself give limit theorems.
  • Wolff (1970) proved a limit theorem for a stationary observed process, using particular properties of its interaction with the Poisson stream.
  • Stidham (1972) proved a limit theorem for regenerative processes, under restrictions on how regeneration points relate to the arrivals.
  • Wolff (1982), the source of this mission, proved the limit theorem with no stationarity, regeneration or ergodicity at all. The only link assumed between system and arrivals is that the system does not anticipate future arrivals. The proof uses Watanabe's (1964) martingale characterization of the Poisson process.
  • Melamed and Whitt (1990) recast the result as one instance of a general "arrivals see time averages" (ASTA) principle for arbitrary point processes.

Setting

Let (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) be a probability space. On it live a process N={N(t),t≥0}N=\{N(t),t\ge0\}N={N(t),t≥0}, the state of a system, with values in an arbitrary measurable space, and a Poisson process A={A(t),t≥0}A=\{A(t),t\ge0\}A={A(t),t≥0} at rate λ>0\lambda>0λ>0, counting customer arrivals in (0,t](0,t](0,t]. The interaction between AAA and NNN is unspecified: arrivals may change the state.

Fix a set BBB of states with {N(t)∈B}∈F\{N(t)\in B\}\in\mathcal F{N(t)∈B}∈F for every t≥0t\ge0t≥0, and define

U(t)=1{N(t)∈B},V(t)=t−1∫0tU(s) ds,Y(t)=∫0tU(s) dA(s),Z(t)=Y(t)A(t).U(t)=\mathbf 1\{N(t)\in B\},\qquad V(t)=t^{-1}\int_0^tU(s)\,ds,\qquad Y(t)=\int_0^tU(s)\,dA(s),\qquad Z(t)=\frac{Y(t)}{A(t)}.U(t)=1{N(t)∈B},V(t)=t−1∫0t​U(s)ds,Y(t)=∫0t​U(s)dA(s),Z(t)=A(t)Y(t)​.

V(t)V(t)V(t) is the fraction of time in [0,t][0,t][0,t] that NNN is in BBB. Y(t)Y(t)Y(t) is the number of arrivals up to ttt who find NNN in BBB, and Z(t)Z(t)Z(t) is the fraction of arrivals who do.

The paths of UUU are assumed left continuous with right-hand limits w.p. 1, so that an arrival is not counted as already present at its own arrival epoch. UUU is assumed jointly measurable in (ω,t)∈Ω×[0,∞)(\omega,t)\in\Omega\times[0,\infty)(ω,t)∈Ω×[0,∞). The single structural assumption is the Lack of Anticipation Assumption (LAA):

for each t≥0t\ge0t≥0, {A(t+u)−A(t),u≥0}\{A(t+u)-A(t),u\ge0\}{A(t+u)−A(t),u≥0} and {U(s),0≤s≤t}\{U(s),0\le s\le t\}{U(s),0≤s≤t} are independent.

The paper's proof of (6) uses this independence for every event of Ft\mathcal F_tFt​, the σ-field generated by {A(s),U(s);0≤s≤t}\{A(s),U(s);0\le s\le t\}{A(s),U(s);0≤s≤t}. The mission therefore states Theorems 1–2, (6), Lemma 1, (10) and Lemma 2 under lack of anticipation with respect to Ft\mathcal F_tFt​: for each t≥0t\ge0t≥0, {A(t+u)−A(t),u≥0}\{A(t+u)-A(t),u\ge0\}{A(t+u)−A(t),u≥0} is independent of Ft\mathcal F_tFt​. This implies the printed LAA. The printed LAA together with independent increments does not give (6) or Lemma 1, because pairwise independence of the future from the past of AAA and from the past of UUU is not independence from their joint past.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1 (p. 225)

Under lack of anticipation (with respect to Ft\mathcal F_tFt​, see above), for every random variable V(∞)V(\infty)V(∞),

V(t)→V(∞) w.p. 1⟺Z(t)→V(∞) w.p. 1,t→∞.V(t)\to V(\infty)\ \text{w.p. 1}\quad\Longleftrightarrow\quad Z(t)\to V(\infty)\ \text{w.p. 1},\qquad t\to\infty.V(t)→V(∞) w.p. 1⟺Z(t)→V(∞) w.p. 1,t→∞.

The limit may be random, and the theorem asserts nothing about whether either average converges. It asserts only that the two converge together, to the same limit.

Milestones

The proof in §2 passes through the following statements, which form the milestone list:

  1. (2), (3): E{Y(t)}=λtE{V(t)}=λE{∫0tU(s) ds}E\{Y(t)\}=\lambda tE\{V(t)\}=\lambda E\{\int_0^tU(s)\,ds\}E{Y(t)}=λtE{V(t)}=λE{∫0t​U(s)ds}.
  2. (6): E{Y(t+h)−Y(t)∣Ft}=λE{∫tt+hU(s) ds∣Ft}E\{Y(t+h)-Y(t)\mid\mathcal F_t\}=\lambda E\{\int_t^{t+h}U(s)\,ds\mid\mathcal F_t\}E{Y(t+h)−Y(t)∣Ft​}=λE{∫tt+h​U(s)ds∣Ft​}.
  3. Lemma 1: R(t)=Y(t)−λtV(t)R(t)=Y(t)-\lambda tV(t)R(t)=Y(t)−λtV(t) is a martingale.
  4. (7): the second-moment bound E{R2(t)}≤λt+2λ2t2E\{R^2(t)\}\le\lambda t+2\lambda^2t^2E{R2(t)}≤λt+2λ2t2.
  5. (10): the grid strong law R(nh)/n→0R(nh)/n\to0R(nh)/n→0 w.p. 1.
  6. (11): the pathwise interpolation bound between grid points.
  7. Lemma 2: R(t)/t→0R(t)/t\to0R(t)/t→0 w.p. 1.
  8. The strong law A(t)/t→λA(t)/t\to\lambdaA(t)/t→λ for the Poisson process.

Companion: Theorem 2 (p. 228)

For a Poisson process with bounded, integrable rate λ(t)\lambda(t)λ(t) and Λ(t)/t→λˉ∈(0,∞)\Lambda(t)/t\to\bar\lambda\in(0,\infty)Λ(t)/t→λˉ∈(0,∞), where Λ(t)=∫0tλ(s) ds\Lambda(t)=\int_0^t\lambda(s)\,dsΛ(t)=∫0t​λ(s)ds, the same equivalence holds with V(t)V(t)V(t) replaced by the rate-weighted average Vˉ(t)=Λ(t)−1∫0tU(s)λ(s) ds\bar V(t)=\Lambda(t)^{-1}\int_0^tU(s)\lambda(s)\,dsVˉ(t)=Λ(t)−1∫0t​U(s)λ(s)ds. Display (12), E{Y(t)}=∫0tE{U(s)}λ(s) dsE\{Y(t)\}=\int_0^tE\{U(s)\}\lambda(s)\,dsE{Y(t)}=∫0t​E{U(s)}λ(s)ds, is its analogue of (3).

Significance

Theorem 1 justifies replacing customer averages by time averages, and conversely, in any model where arrivals are Poisson and the system does not anticipate them. Examples are queue-length distributions seen by arrivals in M/G/c systems, blocking probabilities in Erlang loss models, and state probabilities at arrival epochs in networks with Poisson external input. It needs no ergodic theory of the observed process: convergence of one average has to be established separately, by whatever means suit the model, and the theorem transfers it to the other. Lemma 2 also implies versions of PASTA under weaker modes of convergence (Remark 6).

The result has been proved for four decades and is textbook material. What this mission adds is a machine-checked proof. No formalization of Theorem 1 in a proof assistant is known. A complete development would also contain machine-checked versions of several standard facts not yet available in Mathlib:

  • the strong law for the Poisson process;
  • a strong law for square-integrable martingale differences;
  • Stieltjes integration against a counting path.

Difficulty

The naive argument conditions on the arrival epochs and claims that each arrival "samples" the state at a uniformly random time. This fails because arrivals influence the state: after an arrival, a queue-length process is no longer independent of the arrival stream. LAA only says that the future increments of AAA are independent of the past of UUU. The difficulty is to turn this one-sided independence into an almost-sure statement about long-run averages, along every path and at all times rather than only at fixed ones.

On the technical side, the expected-value identity (3) needs a limit of grid sums. That limit relies on left continuity: without it, U(t)=1{A jumps at t}U(t)=\mathbf 1\{A \text{ jumps at } t\}U(t)=1{A jumps at t} satisfies LAA with V≡0V\equiv0V≡0 but Z≡1Z\equiv1Z≡1. The passage from expectations to a strong law needs a martingale structure and a second-moment bound, and the interpolation between grid times needs a pathwise argument.

Formalization scope

  • Time and paths. Time is R\mathbb RR, and every hypothesis concerns t≥0t\ge0t≥0 only. Processes are maps R→Ω→(⋅)\mathbb R\to\Omega\to(\cdot)R→Ω→(⋅). A Poisson process with intensity function λ(⋅)\lambda(\cdot)λ(⋅) is a counting process A:R→Ω→NA:\mathbb R\to\Omega\to\mathbb NA:R→Ω→N with A(0)=0A(0)=0A(0)=0, every path non-decreasing and right-continuous, Poisson-distributed increments with mean ∫stλ\int_s^t\lambda∫st​λ, and independent increments over any finite increasing sequence of times. The constant-rate case is Theorem 1's setting.
  • The averages. Y(t)Y(t)Y(t) is encoded as ∑k=1A(t)U(Tk)\sum_{k=1}^{A(t)}U(T_k)∑k=1A(t)​U(Tk​) over the arrival epochs Tk=inf⁡{s≥0:A(s)≥k}T_k=\inf\{s\ge0:A(s)\ge k\}Tk​=inf{s≥0:A(s)≥k}, which is the Lebesgue–Stieltjes integral ∫(0,t]U dA\int_{(0,t]}U\,dA∫(0,t]​UdA with multiplicities. Z(t)=0Z(t)=0Z(t)=0 when A(t)=0A(t)=0A(t)=0, and V(0)=0V(0)=0V(0)=0; limits do not see these values.
  • The standing hypotheses. These are carried as binders of the goal: measurability of {N(t)∈B}\{N(t)\in B\}{N(t)∈B} for t≥0t\ge0t≥0, path regularity w.p. 1 (left continuity at t>0t>0t>0, right limits at t≥0t\ge0t≥0), joint measurability on Ω×[0,∞)\Omega\times[0,\infty)Ω×[0,∞), and lack of anticipation as independence of the σ-field of future increments of AAA from Ft\mathcal F_tFt​. The milestones (2), (3), (7) and (11) need less: (2) and (3) are stated under the printed LAA, and (7) and (11) under no independence assumption at all.
  • The limit and the expectations. V(∞)V(\infty)V(∞) is an arbitrary function Ω→R\Omega\to\mathbb RΩ→R, shared by both sides of the equivalence. Expectations in the milestones come with integrability conclusions, or are lower integrals in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], so that no identity holds through Lean's junk value 000 for non-integrable functions.
  • Ruled out. A formalization in which V(∞)V(\infty)V(∞) is quantified separately on each side, which loses "to the same limit". A goal that assumes Lemma 2, (3) or the strong law A(t)/t→λA(t)/t\to\lambdaA(t)/t→λ as a hypothesis. A definition of YYY that counts distinct jump times and not arrivals.

Welcome contributions:

  • a reusable Poisson-process library: the strong law, square moments, independence of increments from a past σ-field;
  • a martingale strong law of Feller's type;
  • Stieltjes sums against counting paths.

All of these are useful well beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • R. W. Wolff, Poisson Arrivals See Time Averages, Operations Research 30(2):223–231, 1982. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.30.2.223
  • S. Watanabe, On discontinuous additive functionals and Lévy measures of a Markov process, Japanese Journal of Mathematics 34:53–70, 1964. https://doi.org/10.4099/jjm1924.34.0_53
  • B. Melamed and W. Whitt, On arrivals that see time averages, Operations Research 38(1):156–172, 1990. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.38.1.156
  • P. Brémaud and J. Jacod, Processus ponctuels et martingales: résultats récents sur la modélisation et le filtrage, Advances in Applied Probability 9(2):362–416, 1977. https://doi.org/10.2307/1426091
  • S. Stidham, Regenerative processes in the theory of queues, with applications to the alternating-priority queue, Advances in Applied Probability 4(3):542–577, 1972.
  • W. Feller, An Introduction to Probability Theory and Its Applications, Vol. II, 2nd ed., Wiley, 1971.
11 thms1 active userReviewed
ProbabilityReinforcement LearningStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Asynchronous Stochastic Approximation and Q-Learning 2: Asynchronous Stochastic Approximation with Outdated Information Converges with Probability 1 Under a Weighted Maximum Norm ContractionResearch Paper

Motivation

Many iterative algorithms update only part of a vector at a time. In a parallel implementation, one processor may read a value written several rounds earlier by another processor. Random observations also perturb each update. John N. Tsitsiklis's 1994 paper gives conditions under which such an asynchronous stochastic iteration still converges. The paper develops the result to analyze Q-learning, where state-action values are revised from sampled costs and successor states. Its general theorem also applies to iterative fixed-point calculations beyond that application.

The central issue is that a processor can choose which component to update after seeing the past, and its input can be stale. A convergence theorem that presumes a fixed update schedule or current data would miss both features. The paper's Assumptions 1–3 describe when delays, sampling noise, and random step sizes remain compatible with almost-sure convergence. Assumption 5 gives a weighted maximum norm contraction for the iteration map. Theorem 3 combines these conditions into the target of this mission.

Setting

Fix a positive integer nnn and write x(t)∈Rnx(t)\in\mathbb R^nx(t)∈Rn for the vector after round t≥0t\ge0t≥0. Let F:Rn→RnF:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb R^nF:Rn→Rn be the map whose fixed point the iteration seeks. For component iii, the step size αi(t)\alpha_i(t)αi​(t) lies in [0,1][0,1][0,1], the noise is wi(t)w_i(t)wi​(t), and τji(t)≤t\tau^i_j(t)\le tτji​(t)≤t is the time from which component jjj was read. Thus xi(t)x^i(t)xi(t) has coordinates xj(τji(t))x_j(\tau^i_j(t))xj​(τji​(t)). With αi(t)=0\alpha_i(t)=0αi​(t)=0 when component iii is idle, all rounds obey the single update equation

xi(t+1)=xi(t)+αi(t)(Fi(xi(t))−xi(t)+wi(t)).x_i(t+1)=x_i(t)+\alpha_i(t)\bigl(F_i(x^i(t))-x_i(t)+w_i(t)\bigr).xi​(t+1)=xi​(t)+αi​(t)(Fi​(xi(t))−xi​(t)+wi​(t)).

All quantities live on a probability space with law P\mathsf PP. The increasing filtration F(t)\mathcal F(t)F(t) represents information available when the step sizes and delays are selected, before the round's noise is observed. Assumption 1 says every timestamp τji(t)\tau^i_j(t)τji​(t) tends to infinity almost surely: no fixed old value remains in use forever. Assumption 2 makes the initial state, chosen step sizes, delays, and noise measurable at the specified times; the noise has conditional mean zero, and its conditional second moment is bounded by a deterministic affine function of the largest squared iterate seen so far. Assumption 3 requires, for each component, divergent total step size and a square-summable step-size sequence, with a deterministic bound on all squared partial sums.

For a vector vvv with strictly positive coordinates, the weighted maximum norm is ∥z∥v=max⁡i∣zi∣/vi\|z\|_v=\max_i |z_i|/v_i∥z∥v​=maxi​∣zi​∣/vi​. Assumption 5 provides x∗∈Rnx^*\in\mathbb R^nx∗∈Rn and β∈[0,1)\beta\in[0,1)β∈[0,1) such that ∥F(x)−x∗∥v≤β∥x−x∗∥v\|F(x)-x^*\|_v\le\beta\|x-x^*\|_v∥F(x)−x∗∥v​≤β∥x−x∗∥v​ for every xxx. Assumption 6, used in the boundedness milestone, requires the related growth bound ∥F(x)∥v≤β∥x∥v+D\|F(x)\|_v\le\beta\|x\|_v+D∥F(x)∥v​≤β∥x∥v​+D for some real DDD. The weighted norm permits different component scales.

Formalization targets

Boundedness under a weighted growth bound

Theorem 1 is the main intermediate target. Under Assumptions 1, 2, 3, and 6, it asserts

P ⁣(∃M∈R  ∀t,i, ∣xi(t)∣≤M)=1.\mathsf P\!\left(\exists M\in\mathbb R\;\forall t,i,\ |x_i(t)|\le M\right)=1.P(∃M∈R∀t,i, ∣xi​(t)∣≤M)=1.

The bound MMM may depend on the sample path. Lemmas 1–3 of the paper are milestones in its analysis: a scalar noisy recursion converges, its tails become uniformly small, and the pathwise bounds in the contradiction step hold.

Almost-sure convergence under a weighted contraction

The goal is Theorem 3, under Assumptions 1, 2, 3, and 5:

P ⁣(lim⁡t→∞x(t)=x∗)=1.\mathsf P\!\left(\lim_{t\to\infty}x(t)=x^*\right)=1.P(t→∞lim​x(t)=x∗)=1.

This theorem does not assume bounded iterates or Assumption 6 separately. Its proof uses Theorem 1 after deriving the needed growth bound from the contraction condition. Lemma 8 is the remaining milestone, comparing the coordinate iterates to an auxiliary deterministic recursion and a noise tail.

Significance

The result gives a fixed-point convergence guarantee when coordinates update at different times, delays can vary, and update choices can depend on past observations. In the paper's Q-learning application, these features describe exploratory sampling and possible parallel computation with old state-action values. For discounted problems, the associated Q-learning map contracts in the maximum norm, so Theorem 3 supplies the convergence step once the stochastic assumptions are checked (Tsitsiklis 1994, §7).

The mathematical results were proved in 1994; this mission asks for machine-checked proofs of their formal statements. Its reusable output would include a model of asynchronous noisy iteration, a scalar martingale-noise convergence lemma with random conditional variance bounds, and a precise interface between weighted contractions and pathwise convergence. The goal and milestone theorem files are currently statements with proof holes, while the definition file compiles without one.

Difficulty

A coordinate's next value depends on a vector assembled from observations at several earlier times. A direct estimate against the current error therefore does not close: the stale coordinates can reflect larger past errors. The noise condition is also tied to the largest iterate seen so far, so a deterministic global variance bound is unavailable before boundedness has been established. These two dependencies make the ordinary synchronous contraction argument insufficient. The scalar noise result and the pathwise comparison lemmas isolate the conditions needed for the boundedness and convergence statements.

Formalization scope

Vectors are functions Fin n → ℝ, with n>0n>0n>0; the source labels coordinates 1,…,n1,\ldots,n1,…,n, while Fin n starts at zero. Function order is componentwise. The model sets αi(t)=0\alpha_i(t)=0αi​(t)=0 on idle rounds and uses the paper's unified update equation. It does not store the sets of update times separately. The delay values on idle rounds are left arbitrary because they do not affect the update; the source chooses the current time there. All step sizes lie in [0,1][0,1][0,1], and all delays are at most the current time, on every sample path.

The probability law is a probability measure. The filtration consists of increasing sub-σ-algebras. The iterate sequence is explicitly assumed adapted in the main theorems, matching the paper's use of x(t)x(t)x(t) and its running maximum as F(t)\mathcal F(t)F(t)-measurable random variables. Conditional moment assumptions use integral inequalities over measurable sets, allowing generalized conditional expectations when the noise need not have a finite unconditional second moment. The conditional upper bound is required nonnegative almost surely, as the original inequality entails. Divergence and square summability use partial sums, so a non-summable series cannot receive a default value.

The maximum norm is the finite supremum of coordinate absolute values, and the weighted norm divides by the strictly positive coordinates of vvv. Almost-sure boundedness means a path-dependent finite bound on every coordinate and time. Pathwise Lemmas 3 and 8 are stated on a retained sample path, with the auxiliary quantities and hypotheses established at their locations in the paper; Lemma 8 uses the proof's translated and rescaled coordinates. These conventions rule out an empty coordinate type, junk integrals, and a vacuous boundedness claim. Contributions to the stated lemmas, their probabilistic infrastructure, and the final convergence proof are within scope.

Selected references

  • John N. Tsitsiklis, Asynchronous Stochastic Approximation and Q-Learning, Machine Learning 16 (1994), 185–202. DOI: 10.1023/A:1022689125041.
7 thms1 active userReviewed
ProbabilityReinforcement LearningStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Asynchronous Stochastic Approximation and Q-Learning 1: Bounded Asynchronous Stochastic Approximation Iterates Converge with Probability 1 to the Unique Fixed Point of a Monotone Continuous MapResearch Paper

Motivation

Q-learning (Watkins, 1989) learns the optimal action values of a Markov decision problem from sampled transitions, without a model of the transition probabilities. At each step only one state–action pair is updated, with a noisy estimate of the Bellman operator evaluated at possibly outdated values of the other pairs. Watkins and Dayan (1992) gave a first convergence proof for discounted problems. Tsitsiklis (1994) and, independently, Jaakkola, Jordan and Singh (1994) placed Q-learning inside the theory of stochastic approximation: the Robbins–Monro scheme of iterating x←x+α (F(x)−x+w)x \leftarrow x + \alpha\,(F(x) - x + w)x←x+α(F(x)−x+w) with decreasing stepsizes and zero-mean noise, here in an asynchronous form where different components are updated at different times using delayed information, as in the distributed iterations of Bertsekas and Tsitsiklis (1989).

Tsitsiklis's paper proves convergence with probability 1 under two structural hypotheses on the iteration mapping FFF: a weighted maximum-norm contraction (Theorem 3), which covers discounted Q-learning, and monotonicity (Theorem 2), which covers undiscounted (stochastic shortest path) problems, whose Bellman operator is monotone but in general not a contraction. This mission formalizes the monotone case.

Setting

A mapping F:Rn→RnF:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb R^nF:Rn→Rn with components F1,…,FnF_1,\dots,F_nF1​,…,Fn​ is given, and the goal is to solve F(x)=xF(x)=xF(x)=x. Time is discrete, t=0,1,2,…t=0,1,2,\dotst=0,1,2,…. The iterate x(t)∈Rnx(t)\in\mathbb R^nx(t)∈Rn evolves by

xi(t+1)=xi(t)+αi(t)(Fi(xi(t))−xi(t)+wi(t)),xi(t)=(x1(τ1i(t)),…,xn(τni(t))),x_i(t+1)=x_i(t)+\alpha_i(t)\bigl(F_i(x^i(t))-x_i(t)+w_i(t)\bigr),\qquad x^i(t)=\bigl(x_1(\tau^i_1(t)),\dots,x_n(\tau^i_n(t))\bigr),xi​(t+1)=xi​(t)+αi​(t)(Fi​(xi(t))−xi​(t)+wi​(t)),xi(t)=(x1​(τ1i​(t)),…,xn​(τni​(t))),

where αi(t)∈[0,1]\alpha_i(t)\in[0,1]αi​(t)∈[0,1] is a stepsize (αi(t)=0\alpha_i(t)=0αi​(t)=0 when component iii is not updated), wi(t)w_i(t)wi​(t) is noise, and 0≤τji(t)≤t0\le\tau^i_j(t)\le t0≤τji​(t)≤t are delays: the update of component iii may read component jjj as it was at an earlier time. All quantities are random variables on a probability space (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) with an increasing sequence of σ-fields {F(t)}\{\mathcal F(t)\}{F(t)}, the history up to the choice of the stepsizes at time ttt.

Vector inequalities are componentwise and eee is the vector of ones. The paper's assumptions are:

  • Assumption 1: every delay index τji(t)\tau^i_j(t)τji​(t) tends to infinity, with probability 1.
  • Assumption 2: x(0)x(0)x(0), αi(t)\alpha_i(t)αi​(t), τji(t)\tau^i_j(t)τji​(t) are F(t)\mathcal F(t)F(t)-measurable and wi(t)w_i(t)wi​(t) is F(t+1)\mathcal F(t+1)F(t+1)-measurable; E[wi(t)∣F(t)]=0E[w_i(t)\mid\mathcal F(t)]=0E[wi​(t)∣F(t)]=0; and E[wi2(t)∣F(t)]≤A+Bmax⁡jmax⁡τ≤t∣xj(τ)∣2E[w_i^2(t)\mid\mathcal F(t)]\le A+B\max_j\max_{\tau\le t}|x_j(\tau)|^2E[wi2​(t)∣F(t)]≤A+Bmaxj​maxτ≤t​∣xj​(τ)∣2 for deterministic constants A,BA,BA,B.
  • Assumption 3: ∑tαi(t)=∞\sum_t\alpha_i(t)=\infty∑t​αi​(t)=∞ and ∑tαi2(t)≤C\sum_t\alpha_i^2(t)\le C∑t​αi2​(t)≤C with probability 1, for a deterministic CCC.
  • Assumption 4: FFF is monotone (x≤y⇒F(x)≤F(y)x\le y\Rightarrow F(x)\le F(y)x≤y⇒F(x)≤F(y)), continuous, has a unique fixed point x∗x^*x∗, and F(x)−re≤F(x−re)≤F(x+re)≤F(x)+reF(x)-re\le F(x-re)\le F(x+re)\le F(x)+reF(x)−re≤F(x−re)≤F(x+re)≤F(x)+re for all xxx and all r>0r>0r>0.

In Lean the algorithm is the structure AsyncSA.Monotone.Algorithm with fields F, x, α, w, τ, and the assumptions are Assumption1–Assumption4.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (p. 189)

Under Assumptions 1–4, if x(t)x(t)x(t) is bounded with probability 1, then

lim⁡t→∞x(t)=x∗with probability 1.\lim_{t\to\infty}x(t)=x^*\qquad\text{with probability 1.}t→∞lim​x(t)=x∗with probability 1.

Boundedness is a hypothesis, not a conclusion: for monotone FFF it must be established separately (the paper does so for Q-learning in §7). The bound may differ between sample paths.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 1 (p. 190): for a scalar recursion W(t+1)=(1−α(t))W(t)+α(t)w(t)W(t+1)=(1-\alpha(t))W(t)+\alpha(t)w(t)W(t+1)=(1−α(t))W(t)+α(t)w(t) with martingale-difference noise whose conditional variance is bounded by an a.s. bounded B(t)B(t)B(t), and stepsizes with ∑α=∞\sum\alpha=\infty∑α=∞, ∑α2≤C\sum\alpha^2\le C∑α2≤C, W(t)→0W(t)\to0W(t)→0 with probability 1.
  2. Lemma 4 (p. 193): the sequences Uk+1=(Uk+F(Uk))/2U^{k+1}=(U^k+F(U^k))/2Uk+1=(Uk+F(Uk))/2, U0=x∗+reU^0=x^*+reU0=x∗+re, and Lk+1=(Lk+F(Lk))/2L^{k+1}=(L^k+F(L^k))/2Lk+1=(Lk+F(Lk))/2, L0=x∗−reL^0=x^*-reL0=x∗−re, satisfy F(Uk)≤Uk+1≤UkF(U^k)\le U^{k+1}\le U^kF(Uk)≤Uk+1≤Uk and F(Lk)≥Lk+1≥LkF(L^k)\ge L^{k+1}\ge L^kF(Lk)≥Lk+1≥Lk.
  3. Lemma 5 (p. 193): Uk→x∗U^k\to x^*Uk→x∗ and Lk→x∗L^k\to x^*Lk→x∗.
  4. Lemma 6 (p. 194): on a sample path where Lk≤x(t)≤UkL^k\le x(t)\le U^kLk≤x(t)≤Uk from time tkt_ktk​ on and all delays exceed tkt_ktk​ from time tk′t'_ktk′​ on, xi(t)≤Xi(t)+Wi(t;tk′)x_i(t)\le X_i(t)+W_i(t;t'_k)xi​(t)≤Xi​(t)+Wi​(t;tk′​), where XiX_iXi​ relaxes from UikU^k_iUik​ towards Fi(Uk)F_i(U^k)Fi​(Uk) and Wi(t;tk′)W_i(t;t'_k)Wi​(t;tk′​) accumulates the noise from tk′t'_ktk′​.
  5. Lemma 7 (p. 195): under the choices of δk\delta_kδk​ and tk′′t''_ktk′′​ made on pp. 194–195, xi(t)≤Uik+1x_i(t)\le U^{k+1}_ixi​(t)≤Uik+1​ for all t≥tk′′t\ge t''_kt≥tk′′​.

Significance

Theorem 2 is the convergence result for asynchronous stochastic approximation driven by a monotone mapping whose fixed point is unique. Its main application is Q-learning for stochastic shortest path problems with improper policies excluded, and more generally any learning scheme whose expected update is a monotone, sup-norm nonexpansive operator in the sense of (7) (dynamic programming operators are the standard examples). The same pattern, an a.s. bounded iterate plus a monotone mean map, recurs in later analyses of asynchronous and distributed learning algorithms.

The result has a published proof but, as far as the platform's catalog shows, no machine-checked one: there is no formalized asynchronous stochastic approximation theorem, and no formal Lemma 1 for random stepsizes and random conditional-variance bounds. A complete development provides the scalar almost-sure convergence lemma, the deterministic envelope argument for monotone maps, and the pathwise comparison steps, each of which is reusable.

Difficulty

The noise has a conditional variance that grows with the iterate, so it is neither bounded nor integrable a priori, and the stepsizes are random and chosen adaptively. The classical deterministic-bound argument for Lemma 1 does not apply directly. The iteration is not a contraction in any norm, so there is no Lyapunov function giving a geometric decrease, and the delays mean that the mapping is evaluated at a vector no single time index describes. Convergence has to be propagated from the deterministic envelopes Uk,LkU^k,L^kUk,Lk to the random iterate through a sequence of random times, one envelope at a time, and each step requires the noise accumulated after a random time to be small uniformly in the remaining horizon.

Formalization scope

  • Components are Fin n (0-based); vectors are Fin n → ℝ with the componentwise order, so Monotone F is Assumption 4(a) exactly. rerere is r • 1.
  • The update is stated in the paper's unified form for every ttt, with αi(t)=0\alpha_i(t)=0αi​(t)=0 off the update times; the update sets TiT^iTi are not represented. The paper sets τji(t)=t\tau^i_j(t)=tτji​(t)=t off TiT^iTi; the formalization leaves τji(t)\tau^i_j(t)τji​(t) free there, which is more general. αi(t)∈[0,1]\alpha_i(t)\in[0,1]αi​(t)∈[0,1] and τji(t)≤t\tau^i_j(t)\le tτji​(t)≤t hold on every sample path.
  • Conditional expectations are generalized, written with set integrals (CondMeanZero, CondSqLe): ∫Sw dP=0\int_S w\,dP=0∫S​wdP=0 for every F(t)\mathcal F(t)F(t)-set SSS on which www is integrable, and ∫Sw2 dP≤∫Sg+ dP\int_S w^2\,dP\le\int_S g^+\,dP∫S​w2dP≤∫S​g+dP in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]. Mathlib's condExp is not used: it is 000 for non-integrable functions and would make the noise assumptions vacuous.
  • Series conditions use partial sums (divergence to +∞+\infty+∞; every partial sum at most CCC), never tsum, which is 000 for non-summable sequences. The constants A,B,CA,B,CA,B,C are chosen before the almost-sure quantifier; the bound on x(t)x(t)x(t) is chosen after it.
  • The paper treats x(t)x(t)x(t) as determined by F(t)\mathcal F(t)F(t) and uses this implicitly; Theorem 2 assumes it explicitly (Adapted).
  • Lemma 1 leaves W(0)W(0)W(0) unconstrained, as on the page. Lemmas 4 and 5 hold for every r>0r>0r>0. Lemmas 6 and 7 are pathwise: they fix one sample path and take the induction's objects (kkk, tkt_ktk​, tk′t'_ktk′​, tk′′t''_ktk′′​, XXX, δk\delta_kδk​) as given with exactly the properties the paper has established for them; they are not existential statements about these times.
  • A trivializing formalization (junk conditional expectations, tsum for the series, a deterministic bound on x(t)x(t)x(t), or a second unrelated x∗x^*x∗) is ruled out by the choices above.

Contributions welcome: a general almost-sure convergence theorem for Robbins–Monro recursions with generalized conditional moments (Lemma 1 and its tail version W(t;t0)W(t;t_0)W(t;t0​)), and lemmas on monotone maps satisfying (7).

Selected references

  • J. N. Tsitsiklis, Asynchronous Stochastic Approximation and Q-Learning, Machine Learning 16 (1994) 185–202. https://doi.org/10.1023/A:1022689125041
  • C. J. C. H. Watkins and P. Dayan, Q-learning, Machine Learning 8 (1992) 279–292. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00992698
  • T. Jaakkola, M. I. Jordan and S. P. Singh, On the Convergence of Stochastic Iterative Dynamic Programming Algorithms, Neural Computation 6 (1994) 1185–1201. https://doi.org/10.1162/neco.1994.6.6.1185
  • D. P. Bertsekas and J. N. Tsitsiklis, Parallel and Distributed Computation: Numerical Methods, Prentice Hall, 1989. https://hdl.handle.net/1721.1/3719
  • B. T. Poljak and Ya. Z. Tsypkin, Pseudogradient adaptation and training algorithms, Automation and Remote Control 34 (1973) 377–397.
  • H. Robbins and S. Monro, A Stochastic Approximation Method, Annals of Mathematical Statistics 22 (1951) 400–407. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177729586
7 thms1 active userReviewed
Dynamic ProgrammingProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Optimal Inventory Policies for Assembly Systems Under Random Demands 1: In Long-Run Balance, an Assembly System Has the Optimal Policies of an Equivalent Series SystemResearch Paper

Motivation

An assembly system must coordinate the production of components that meet at a common downstream item. A shortage of any required component can delay the finished product, while producing a component too early incurs holding cost. In Rosling's 1989 study, the central question is whether optimal decisions for such a tree can be understood using the simpler theory of a pure series inventory system. The paper proves an equivalence when the initial inventory positions are in a condition it calls long-run balance. That equivalence gives a precise route from an assembly network to serial inventory control without discarding its lead times or its discounted costs.

Setting

There are items 1,…,N1,\ldots,N1,…,N in a tree rooted at end item 111. Every item i>1i>1i>1 has one immediate successor s(i)<is(i)<is(i)<i; one unit of each component is needed for an end unit. Let lil_ili​ be the production or delivery lead time of item iii. The total lead time MiM_iMi​ is the sum of lead times on the path from iii to the end item, with M0=0M_0=0M0​=0, and the equivalent lead time is Li=Mi−Mi−1L_i=M_i-M_{i-1}Li​=Mi​−Mi−1​. Items are indexed so that MiM_iMi​ is nondecreasing. These definitions and indexing conditions are in §§1–2 of the paper.

At the beginning of each period ttt, outstanding orders arrive, the controller chooses the post-order echelon position YitY_{it}Yit​, and then demand ξt\xi_tξt​ for the end item occurs. The pre-order position is XitX_{it}Xit​, while XktlX^l_{kt}Xktl​ is the position of predecessor kkk from orders old enough to arrive after its lead time. A decision is feasible when Xit≤Yit≤XktlX_{it}\le Y_{it}\le X^l_{kt}Xit​≤Yit​≤Xktl​ for every immediate predecessor kkk of iii. Decisions depend only on demands already observed. The demands are independent and identically distributed, nonnegative, and have a density and a finite positive mean.

The discounted Problem P charges echelon holding cost hih_ihi​ for item iii and a shortage coefficient p+H1p+H_1p+H1​ for the end item. Its discount factor is α\alphaα. The objective is the expectation of the sum over periods of the holding charges and the expected end-item shortfall over l1+1l_1+1l1​+1 demands, with a constant independent of the policy. The paper's Assumption requires every hi>0h_i>0hi​>0 and ∑ihiα−Ms(i)<p+H1\sum_i h_i\alpha^{-M_{s(i)}}<p+H_1∑i​hi​α−Ms(i)​<p+H1​. The system is in long-run balance in period ttt when positions of adjacent items, compared at the same age relative to total lead time, satisfy equation (5):

XitMi−μ≤Xi+1,tMi+1−μ(1≤i<N, 0≤μ<Mi).X^{M_i-\mu}_{it}\le X^{M_{i+1}-\mu}_{i+1,t} \quad(1\le i<N,\ 0\le\mu<M_i).XitMi​−μ​≤Xi+1,tMi+1​−μ​(1≤i<N, 0≤μ<Mi​).

Formalization targets

Equivalent series optimal policies

The equivalent series system has successor i−1i-1i−1, lead time LiL_iLi​, the same demand law and shortage coefficient, and holding coefficient hiαli−Lih_i\alpha^{l_i-L_i}hi​αli​−Li​. Theorem 2 states that its optimal policies and those of the assembly system agree when the assembly system is initially in long-run balance. In the formal statement, the first inclusion is unconditional; the reverse inclusion is conditional on Problem P attaining an optimum:

Opt⁡(P)⊆Opt⁡(Pseries),Opt⁡(P)≠∅⟹Opt⁡(Pseries)⊆Opt⁡(P).\operatorname{Opt}(P)\subseteq\operatorname{Opt}(P_{\mathrm{series}}), \qquad \operatorname{Opt}(P)\ne\varnothing \Longrightarrow \operatorname{Opt}(P_{\mathrm{series}})\subseteq\operatorname{Opt}(P).Opt(P)⊆Opt(Pseries​),Opt(P)=∅⟹Opt(Pseries​)⊆Opt(P).

The target includes Lemmas 1 and 2, Theorem 1, Corollary 1, and the cost identity displayed in the proof of Theorem 2. Lemma 1 limits excess production, Lemma 2 gives a production lower bound, Theorem 1 describes when long-run balance is reached and preserved, and Corollary 1 uses the adjacent series position in that result. Each is stated at the strength given on pp. 568–569 of the paper.

Significance

Theorem 2 identifies the same policy choices in a tree assembly problem and a series problem whose stages have modified lead times and holding coefficients. It makes the serial interpretation exact for initially balanced systems and supports the paper's later discussion of series-system calculations. The statement is an equivalence of optimal policies, rather than just an equality of numerical values, so both the feasible-policy comparison and the cost comparison matter.

The theorem and its supporting results are proved in the 1989 paper; they have not been machine-checked in this development. A complete formalization would supply a reusable account of finite-history inventory policies, random demand histories, echelon positions, and extended-real discounted objectives. The published serial model SupplyChainTheory_multiechelon represents a different stage-indexed system; the assembly tree, its initial pipeline, and Problem P still need their own definitions. The paper's order-up-to Corollary 2 relies on an extension of earlier serial results and is outside this target.

Difficulty

The first natural comparison is to replace the tree's predecessor constraints with adjacent-item constraints. Those feasible sets are not equal for arbitrary states: positions at different total lead times can cross, and initial orders placed before period 1 affect the earliest periods. Long-run balance controls the necessary position comparisons, but equation (5) is empty for an item with Mi=0M_i=0Mi​=0. The printed proof also uses a middle inequality outside the range covered by equation (5) when an equivalent lead time vanishes. A faithful statement must account for these boundary cases without defining the series problem through the assembly problem's optimal policies.

Formalization scope

Items use the paper's indices 1,…,N1,\ldots,N1,…,N, with N≥1N\ge1N≥1 and s(1)=0s(1)=0s(1)=0. Lean period kkk is paper period t=k+1t=k+1t=k+1; the policy sees exactly kkk earlier demands. The common demand law ν\nuν is a probability measure on the reals, concentrated on nonnegative values, absolutely continuous with respect to Lebesgue measure, integrable, and of positive mean. The law of demand over l1+1l_1+1l1​+1 periods is the pushforward of a finite product law under summation. Feasibility and the optimal-policy bounds are almost-sure statements, so changes on null histories do not alter them. Pathwise balance results quantify over one nonnegative demand path.

Initial positions include the orders placed before period 1. Their ages are monotone and obey the predecessor constraints inherited from that past. In addition to the paper's initial long-run balance, a separate boundary condition carries the missing comparison when Mi=0M_i=0Mi​=0. Discounting is restricted to 0<α<10<\alpha<10<α<1: at α=1\alpha=1α=1 the paper specifies average cost through a separate limiting prescription. The formal cost lies in the extended reals and is computed from its positive and negative parts; under the Assumption, feasible policies have a finite negative part. The policy-independent constant of equation (2) is omitted from both systems. “Optimal” means feasible and no more costly than every feasible policy, never a default value of an empty infimum.

The series system is built as a second instance of the same model, using the paper's successor, lead-time, and holding-coefficient transformations. Its cost and constraint (3) are then computed by the shared definitions. Contributions toward the lead-time identities, almost-sure policy comparisons, finite-time balance theorem, and extended-real cost identity are all part of the scope.

Selected references

  • Kaj Rosling, Optimal Inventory Policies for Assembly Systems under Random Demands, Operations Research 37(4):565–579, 1989. DOI: 10.1287/opre.37.4.565.
10 thms1 active userReviewed
Algorithmic Game Theory·Captain: mikedeng1

The Fair Division of a Fixed Supply Among a Growing Population: WPO, Anonymity, Scale Invariance, Continuity and Population Monotonicity Characterize the Kalai–Smorodinsky SolutionResearch Paper

Motivation

Axiomatic bargaining theory asks which rule should divide a set of feasible utility vectors among a group of agents, and answers by listing properties a reasonable rule must have and determining the rules that have them. Nash's solution (Nash 1950) and the Kalai–Smorodinsky solution (Kalai and Smorodinsky 1975) are the two classical answers for a fixed set of two agents. Both characterizations take the number of agents as given.

In many division problems the group is not fixed: a supply of goods that was to be shared among some agents must later be shared among more. Thomson (1983) (Math. Oper. Res. 8:319–326) introduced a framework in which the population varies and a solution is a family of rules, one for each finite group. He proposed an axiom tying the rules for different groups together: when new agents arrive and the resources stay fixed, none of the original agents should gain (population monotonicity). The paper shows that this axiom, combined with four standard ones, singles out the Kalai–Smorodinsky solution.

Timeline.

  • 1950: Nash characterizes the Nash solution for two agents.
  • 1975: Kalai and Smorodinsky replace Nash's independence axiom by individual monotonicity and characterize their solution for two agents.
  • 1980: Roth (Internat. J. Game Theory 8, 129–132, cited as [5] in Thomson 1983) discusses the nnn-agent extension; Thomson notes that without comprehensiveness the nnn-agent solution can fail weak Pareto-optimality once n≥3n \ge 3n≥3.
  • 1983: Thomson characterizes the Kalai–Smorodinsky solution for a variable population by WPO, anonymity, scale invariance, continuity and population monotonicity. This is the result of this mission.

Setting

The agents are the natural numbers, and a group PPP is a nonempty finite set of agents. For a group PPP, RP\mathbb R^PRP is the space of real vectors indexed by PPP, and R+P\mathbb R^P_+R+P​ its nonnegative orthant. For vectors, x>yx > yx>y means xi>yix_i > y_ixi​>yi​ for every iii, x≧yx \geqq yx≧y means xi≥yix_i \ge y_ixi​≥yi​ for every iii, and x⩾yx \geqslant yx⩾y means x≧yx \geqq yx≧y with x≠yx \ne yx=y.

A division problem for PPP is a set S⊆R+PS \subseteq \mathbb R^P_+S⊆R+P​ that is compact, convex, contains a strictly positive vector, and is comprehensive: if x∈Sx \in Sx∈S and 0≦y≦x0 \leqq y \leqq x0≦y≦x, then y∈Sy \in Sy∈S. The class of these problems is ΣP\Sigma^PΣP. The subclass Σ~P\tilde\Sigma^PΣ~P also requires that whenever x,y∈Sx, y \in Sx,y∈S and y⩾xy \geqslant xy⩾x, some z∈Sz \in Sz∈S satisfies z>xz > xz>x.

A solution FFF chooses a point FP(S)∈SF^P(S) \in SFP(S)∈S for every group PPP and every S∈ΣPS \in \Sigma^PS∈ΣP. The ideal point of SSS is a(S)a(S)a(S), with ai(S)=max⁡x∈Sxia_i(S) = \max_{x \in S} x_iai​(S)=maxx∈S​xi​. The Kalai–Smorodinsky solution KKK selects the largest point of SSS on the segment from the origin to a(S)a(S)a(S):

KP(S)=t∗ a(S),t∗=max⁡{t≥0:t a(S)∈S}.K^P(S) = t^*\,a(S), \qquad t^* = \max\{t \ge 0 : t\,a(S) \in S\}.KP(S)=t∗a(S),t∗=max{t≥0:ta(S)∈S}.

The axioms on a solution FFF are:

  • WPO: no y∈Sy \in Sy∈S has y>FP(S)y > F^P(S)y>FP(S).
  • PO: no y∈Sy \in Sy∈S has y⩾FP(S)y \geqslant F^P(S)y⩾FP(S).
  • An: relabelling the agents along a bijection γ:P→P′\gamma : P \to P'γ:P→P′ relabels the outcome.
  • S. Inv: rescaling each agent's utility by a positive factor rescales the outcome the same way.
  • Cont: FP(Sk)→FP(S)F^P(S^k) \to F^P(S)FP(Sk)→FP(S) whenever Sk→SS^k \to SSk→S in the Hausdorff metric.
  • Mon: if P⊆QP \subseteq QP⊆Q, S∈ΣPS \in \Sigma^PS∈ΣP, T∈ΣQT \in \Sigma^QT∈ΣQ, and S=T∩RPS = T \cap \mathbb R^PS=T∩RP (the points of TTT that give zero to everyone outside PPP), then FiP(S)≥FiQ(T)F^P_i(S) \ge F^Q_i(T)FiP​(S)≥FiQ​(T) for every i∈Pi \in Pi∈P.

Formalization targets

Goal: the characterization (Theorems 1 and 3)

For every solution FFF,

F satisfies WPO, An, S. Inv, Cont, Mon  ⟺  FP(S)=KP(S)  for all finite P and all S∈ΣP.F \text{ satisfies WPO, An, S. Inv, Cont, Mon} \iff F^P(S) = K^P(S)\ \text{ for all finite } P \text{ and all } S \in \Sigma^P.F satisfies WPO, An, S. Inv, Cont, Mon⟺FP(S)=KP(S)  for all finite P and all S∈ΣP.

Milestones

  1. Theorem 1. KKK is a solution and satisfies WPO, An, S. Inv, Cont and Mon.
  2. Theorem 2, ∣P∣=2|P| = 2∣P∣=2. Under WPO, An, S. Inv and Mon, FP(S)≧KP(S)F^P(S) \geqq K^P(S)FP(S)≧KP(S) for every two-agent group.
  3. The replica problem (appendix). If a(S)=ePa(S) = e^Pa(S)=eP, aeP∈Sa e^P \in SaeP∈S and i0∈Pi_0 \in Pi0​∈P, there are Q⊇PQ \supseteq PQ⊇P with ∣Q∣=3∣P∣−2|Q| = 3|P| - 2∣Q∣=3∣P∣−2 and T∈ΣQT \in \Sigma^QT∈ΣQ such that T∩RP=ST \cap \mathbb R^P = ST∩RP=S and aeQ∈Ta e^Q \in TaeQ∈T. In addition, every agent j∈Qj \in Qj∈Q faces, in some slice of TTT, a relabelled copy of SSS in which jjj holds agent i0i_0i0​'s position.
  4. Theorem 2. Under WPO, An, S. Inv and Mon, FP(S)≧KP(S)F^P(S) \geqq K^P(S)FP(S)≧KP(S) for every PPP and every S∈ΣPS \in \Sigma^PS∈ΣP.
  5. Corollary 1. Under the same four axioms, F=KF = KF=K on every Σ~P\tilde\Sigma^PΣ~P.
  6. Density. Every S∈ΣPS \in \Sigma^PS∈ΣP is a Hausdorff limit of problems in Σ~P\tilde\Sigma^PΣ~P.
  7. Theorem 3. WPO, An, S. Inv, Cont and Mon imply F=KF = KF=K on every ΣP\Sigma^PΣP.

Two further statements accompany the goal. Corollary 2 says that no solution satisfies PO, An, S. Inv and Mon. Lemma 1 says that some solution other than KKK satisfies WPO, An, S. Inv and Mon.

Significance

The theorem identifies the Kalai–Smorodinsky solution as the only rule, among those treating agents symmetrically and ignoring utility units, under which an arrival of new claimants never benefits existing ones. Corollary 2 shows that weak Pareto-optimality cannot be strengthened to Pareto-optimality. Lemma 1 shows that continuity cannot be dropped. Together they fix the logical boundary of the result. The replica construction of the appendix is a reusable device: a problem in which every agent of a larger group faces an exact copy of one agent's situation.

The result has been proved since 1983. It has not been machine-checked, and to our knowledge no proof assistant library contains bargaining problems, solutions or the Kalai–Smorodinsky solution. The mission produces these definitions and checks the full argument, including two steps the paper asserts without proof. One is that the replica problem has the required slices. The other is that problems satisfying condition (c) are dense in the Hausdorff metric. Formalizing the paper also exposes a printed slip: Theorem 2 is stated as an equivalence, but only one direction is true and proved, and only that direction is stated here.

Difficulty

Theorem 1 asks for routine but real convex analysis. Continuity of KKK requires the ideal point and the maximal scalar t∗t^*t∗ to move continuously with SSS in the Hausdorff metric. Comprehensiveness and the strictly positive vector are what make this work.

The substance is in Theorem 2. The first thought is to compare FP(S)F^P(S)FP(S) with KP(S)K^P(S)KP(S) inside SSS alone, using only WPO, An and S. Inv. That cannot work: Lemma 1 exhibits a solution satisfying all four axioms that differs from KKK, so the argument must leave the group PPP. The proof builds a larger problem TTT in which every member of an enlarged group faces a copy of the worst-treated agent's position. Mon then caps each agent's payoff in TTT, and WPO fails at the diagonal point aeQa e^QaeQ. Choosing the groups and bijections, and verifying that each slice of the convex comprehensive hull is exactly the intended copy, is the delicate part. The paper dismisses it as "clear".

Theorem 3 needs the density of Σ~P\tilde\Sigma^PΣ~P in ΣP\Sigma^PΣP. An approximating problem must lose every flat face on its weak Pareto boundary while staying compact, convex and comprehensive.

Formalization scope

Agents are ℕ, where the paper uses {1,2,… }\{1, 2, \dots\}{1,2,…}; this relabelling is harmless. Groups are nonempty: for the empty group, R∅\mathbb R^\emptysetR∅ is a point and WPO would hold for no solution, so the page's "finite subsets" is read as nonempty finite subsets. A group is a Finset ℕ, and RP\mathbb R^PRP is the function type P → ℝ, whose metric is the sup metric. Hausdorff convergence uses Mathlib's extended Hausdorff distance Metric.hausdorffEDist. Convergence in it is equivalent to Euclidean Hausdorff convergence, because the norms are equivalent.

A solution is a total function on all sets, together with the hypothesis IsSolution F that FP(S)∈SF^P(S) \in SFP(S)∈S for S∈ΣPS \in \Sigma^PS∈ΣP. Every axiom quantifies over problems in ΣP\Sigma^PΣP only, and "FFF is the Kalai–Smorodinsky solution" means agreement on every ΣP\Sigma^PΣP. Two formalizations of the goal would be trivial or false, and the statements here rule out both: one that equates FFF and KKK as functions, and one that drops IsSolution.

The remaining conventions are these.

  • KKK and the ideal point use sSup. Both suprema are attained on ΣP\Sigma^PΣP.
  • T∩RPT \cap \mathbb R^PT∩RP is the set of xxx whose zero-extension lies in TTT.
  • An quantifies over bijections P ≃ P'.
  • Scalings have strictly positive factors.

Deviation from the page. Theorem 2's printed "if" direction is false, so only "only if" is stated. For example, choosing (2,1,1)(2,1,1)(2,1,1) on cch{(2,1,1),(0,2,0),(0,0,2)}\mathrm{cch}\{(2,1,1),(0,2,0),(0,0,2)\}cch{(2,1,1),(0,2,0),(0,0,2)} and KKK elsewhere gives a solution with F≧KF \geqq KF≧K that violates S. Inv. The replica milestone states the appendix construction existentially, for a generic agent i0i_0i0​ instead of agent 1.

Out of scope: Theorem 4 (solutions defined on Σ~P\tilde\Sigma^PΣ~P only, whose necessity proof is a sketch), and the remarks of §4.2–§4.4.

A complete development needs Hausdorff-metric continuity of maxima over compact sets and the convex comprehensive hull. It also needs elementary facts about slices and relabellings of comprehensive sets. All of these are reusable for other bargaining and fair-division formalizations. Contributions are welcome on any milestone, and on lemmas about ΣP\Sigma^PΣP that several milestones share.

Selected references

  • W. Thomson, The fair division of a fixed supply among a growing population, Mathematics of Operations Research 8(3):319–326, 1983. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.8.3.319
  • E. Kalai and M. Smorodinsky, Other solutions to Nash's bargaining problem, Econometrica 43(3):513–518, 1975. https://doi.org/10.2307/1914280
  • J. F. Nash, The bargaining problem, Econometrica 18(2):155–162, 1950. https://doi.org/10.2307/1907266
  • A. E. Roth, An impossibility result for n-person games, International Journal of Game Theory 8:129–132, 1980 (as cited in Thomson 1983, reference [5]); see the reference list of https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.8.3.319
9 thms1 active userReviewed
ProbabilityStatisticsStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Estimating Variance From High, Low and Closing Prices I: S_t(S_t − X_t) + I_t(I_t − X_t) Has Mean σ²t for Brownian Motion With Any DriftResearch Paper

Motivation

The logarithm of a share price is commonly modelled as a Brownian motion with drift, Xt=σBt+ctX_t=\sigma B_t+ctXt​=σBt​+ct. The Black–Scholes option pricing formula needs the volatility σ\sigmaσ but not the drift ccc, so a practitioner must estimate σ2\sigma^2σ2 from data. Observing the whole path would give σ2\sigma^2σ2 exactly through its quadratic variation, but a real observer sees far less. The most readily available daily information is the opening and closing prices together with the day's high and low.

Parkinson (1980) proposed an estimator from the high–low range, and Garman and Klass (1980) found the minimum-variance estimator among a class of quadratic functions of high, low and close. Both were derived assuming zero drift, c=0c=0c=0, and the Garman–Klass estimator is biased when c≠0c\neq0c=0. Rogers and Satchell (Ann. Appl. Probab. 1 (1991) 504–512) proposed the estimator

σ^2≡S1(S1−X1)+I1(I1−X1),\hat\sigma^2\equiv S_1(S_1-X_1)+I_1(I_1-X_1),σ^2≡S1​(S1​−X1​)+I1​(I1​−X1​),

which is unbiased for every drift. Their estimator is now a standard tool in empirical finance for range-based volatility measurement.

Setting

Fix a probability space (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) carrying a standard Brownian motion B=(Bt)t≥0B=(B_t)_{t\ge0}B=(Bt​)t≥0​: B0=0B_0=0B0​=0, its increments over disjoint intervals are independent and Gaussian with variance equal to the length of the interval, and every sample path t↦Bt(ω)t\mapsto B_t(\omega)t↦Bt​(ω) is continuous. Fix a drift c∈Rc\in\mathbb Rc∈R and a volatility σ≥0\sigma\ge0σ≥0. The log-price is

Xt=σBt+ct,t≥0,X_t=\sigma B_t+ct,\qquad t\ge0,Xt​=σBt​+ct,t≥0,

and, for a trading period [0,t][0,t][0,t], the running maximum and running minimum are

St=sup⁡0≤u≤tXu,It=inf⁡0≤u≤tXu.S_t=\sup_{0\le u\le t}X_u,\qquad I_t=\inf_{0\le u\le t}X_u.St​=0≤u≤tsup​Xu​,It​=0≤u≤tinf​Xu​.

Thus StS_tSt​, ItI_tIt​ and XtX_tXt​ are the high, the low and the close of the log-price (with the open normalized to X0=0X_0=0X0​=0). In Lean these are logPrice σ c B t ω, runMax σ c B t ω and runMin σ c B t ω in the namespace RogersSatchell.Unbiased.

The proof in the paper passes through an exponential time: a random variable TTT with P(T>x)=e−λxP(T>x)=e^{-\lambda x}P(T>x)=e−λx (rate λ>0\lambda>0λ>0, mean λ−1\lambda^{-1}λ−1), independent of the whole path BBB. For σ>0\sigma>0σ>0 the rates

α=c2+2λσ2−cσ2,β=c2+2λσ2+cσ2\alpha=\frac{\sqrt{c^2+2\lambda\sigma^2}-c}{\sigma^2},\qquad \beta=\frac{\sqrt{c^2+2\lambda\sigma^2}+c}{\sigma^2}α=σ2c2+2λσ2​−c​,β=σ2c2+2λσ2​+c​

appear, in Lean alpha σ c lam and beta σ c lam.

Formalization targets

Goal: display (3)

For every c∈Rc\in\mathbb Rc∈R, every σ≥0\sigma\ge0σ≥0 and every t≥0t\ge0t≥0, St(St−Xt)+It(It−Xt)S_t(S_t-X_t)+I_t(I_t-X_t)St​(St​−Xt​)+It​(It​−Xt​) is integrable and

E[St(St−Xt)+It(It−Xt)]=σ2t.E\big[S_t(S_t-X_t)+I_t(I_t-X_t)\big]=\sigma^2t.E[St​(St​−Xt​)+It​(It​−Xt​)]=σ2t.

At t=1t=1t=1 this is the unbiasedness of σ^2\hat\sigma^2σ^2 of display (2). The statement quantifies over all drifts; the absence of ccc on the right-hand side is the content.

Milestones (Section 2, pp. 505–506)

  1. At an independent exponential time TTT of rate λ\lambdaλ: ST∼Exp⁡(α)S_T\sim\operatorname{Exp}(\alpha)ST​∼Exp(α) and −IT∼Exp⁡(β)-I_T\sim\operatorname{Exp}(\beta)−IT​∼Exp(β).
  2. The Wiener–Hopf splitting: STS_TST​ and ST−XTS_T-X_TST​−XT​ are independent, and ST−XTS_T-X_TST​−XT​ has the law of −IT-I_T−IT​.
  3. E[ST(ST−XT)]=1/(αβ)=σ2/2λE[S_T(S_T-X_T)]=1/(\alpha\beta)=\sigma^2/2\lambdaE[ST​(ST​−XT​)]=1/(αβ)=σ2/2λ.
  4. E[ST(ST−XT)]=∫0∞λe−λt E[St(St−Xt)] dtE[S_T(S_T-X_T)]=\int_0^\infty\lambda e^{-\lambda t}\,E[S_t(S_t-X_t)]\,dtE[ST​(ST​−XT​)]=∫0∞​λe−λtE[St​(St​−Xt​)]dt.
  5. E[St(St−Xt)]=σ2t/2E[S_t(S_t-X_t)]=\sigma^2t/2E[St​(St​−Xt​)]=σ2t/2 for every t≥0t\ge0t≥0.
  6. E[It(It−Xt)]=σ2t/2E[I_t(I_t-X_t)]=\sigma^2t/2E[It​(It​−Xt​)]=σ2t/2 for every t≥0t\ge0t≥0.
  7. (off the goal's path) With Y1=S1(S1−X1)Y_1=S_1(S_1-X_1)Y1​=S1​(S1​−X1​), Y2=I1(I1−X1)Y_2=I_1(I_1-X_1)Y2​=I1​(I1​−X1​): EY12=EY22=σ4/2E Y_1^2=EY_2^2=\sigma^4/2EY12​=EY22​=σ4/2, E(Y1+Y2)2≤2σ4E(Y_1+Y_2)^2\le2\sigma^4E(Y1​+Y2​)2≤2σ4 and var⁡(σ^2)≤σ4\operatorname{var}(\hat\sigma^2)\le\sigma^4var(σ^2)≤σ4, for every drift ccc.

Significance

The goal certifies a drift-free unbiased volatility estimator built from four numbers per trading day. Because only σ2\sigma^2σ2 enters the Black–Scholes formula, an estimator whose mean does not depend on the nuisance parameter ccc is exactly what is needed. Milestone 7 complements this with a drift-uniform bound on its variance, var⁡(σ^2)≤σ4\operatorname{var}(\hat\sigma^2)\le\sigma^4var(σ^2)≤σ4, while the exact value 0.331σ40.331\sigma^40.331σ4 quoted in the paper is only available at c=0c=0c=0.

On the formalization side, the results are classical and proved; none is machine-checked as far as the platform's catalog shows. A complete development would give the first formal treatment of the joint law of the running maximum of drifted Brownian motion at an exponential time, of the Wiener–Hopf splitting at the maximum, and of a Laplace-inversion argument for a moment function of the time horizon. All three are reusable well beyond volatility estimation: in ruin theory, queueing (reflected Brownian motion), and the pricing of lookback and barrier options.

Difficulty

The obvious approach, computing E[St(St−Xt)]E[S_t(S_t-X_t)]E[St​(St​−Xt​)] directly from the joint density of (St,Xt)(S_t,X_t)(St​,Xt​) for drifted Brownian motion, requires the reflection principle combined with a Girsanov change of measure, followed by a double integral involving Gaussian tails, done separately for each sign of ccc. The cancellation that makes the drift disappear is not visible in that computation, and a statement specialized to c=0c=0c=0 (where the reflection principle alone suffices) does not carry over. Every step of the milestone list rests on path properties of Brownian motion (the strong Markov property, the law of the running maximum, splitting at the maximum) that Mathlib does not yet provide for IsBrownianReal, and the passage from milestone 4 to milestone 5 needs uniqueness of the Laplace transform.

Formalization scope

  • Brownian motion is Mathlib's ProbabilityTheory.IsBrownianReal B P with B : ℝ≥0 → Ω → ℝ, plus the hypothesis that every sample path is continuous (the standard choice of a continuous version). Time is ℝ≥0.
  • StS_tSt​ and ItI_tIt​ are the real sSup/sInf of the path over the interval [0,t][0,t][0,t]; with continuous paths they are attained. The supremum is never taken over all times or in extended reals.
  • "EEE" is the Bochner integral, and every expectation identity also asserts integrability, so no identity can hold through Lean's convention that a non-integrable function integrates to 000.
  • "TTT exponential with mean λ−1\lambda^{-1}λ−1" is HasLaw T (expMeasure λ) P; "parameter α\alphaα" is read as rate α\alphaα. "Independent of BBB" is independence from the path-valued random variable with the product σ-algebra. STS_TST​ is evaluated at TTT truncated to [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞).
  • "Has the same law as" is equality of image measures, together with the almost-everywhere measurability of both maps.
  • "Inversion of the Laplace transform gives" becomes the fixed-time identity for every t≥0t\ge0t≥0 (milestones 5 and 6), separate from the Laplace identity (milestone 4).
  • Milestones 1 and 3 assume σ>0\sigma>0σ>0 because α,β\alpha,\betaα,β divide by σ2\sigma^2σ2; the Wiener–Hopf splitting, the goal, and milestones 4–7 allow σ≥0\sigma\ge0σ≥0.

A formalization that specializes to c=0c=0c=0, takes the supremum over all of [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), or omits the integrability conjuncts is not the statement of this mission.

Infrastructure that a complete development needs: the reflection principle or the strong Markov property for Brownian motion, the exponential-time law of the running maximum of a Lévy process, and uniqueness of Laplace transforms for continuous functions. All of these are reusable; contributions of any of them are welcome. Related platform items cover other objects and are credited here: running maxima and exit problems for spectrally negative Lévy processes (Avram2004.Exit.reflected), a drifted Brownian motion in characteristic-function form in a queueing-network setting (Reiman84.QueueLength.Paths), and a GI/G/1 Wiener–Hopf transform identity (QueueingFundamentals.GG1.wiener_hopf_transform).

Selected references

  • L. C. G. Rogers and S. E. Satchell, Estimating variance from high, low and closing prices, The Annals of Applied Probability 1(4), 1991, 504–512. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoap/1177005835
  • M. B. Garman and M. J. Klass, On the estimation of security price volatilities from historical data, Journal of Business 53(1), 1980, 67–78. https://doi.org/10.1086/296072
  • M. Parkinson, The extreme value method for estimating the variance of the rate of return, Journal of Business 53(1), 1980, 61–65. https://doi.org/10.1086/296071
  • P. Greenwood and J. Pitman, Fluctuation identities for Lévy processes and splitting at the maximum, Advances in Applied Probability 12(4), 1980, 893–902. https://doi.org/10.2307/1426747
9 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

A Dual Approach to Solving Nonlinear Programming Problems by Unconstrained Optimization 3: Under Second-Order Conditions, Tolerances αₖ ≤ q[sup g_r − g_r(yᵏ)] Give |xᵏ − x̄| ≤ s|yᵏ − ȳ|Research Paper

Motivation

The method of multipliers (augmented Lagrangian method), proposed independently by Hestenes and Powell in 1969, solves a constrained optimization problem by a sequence of unconstrained minimizations of a penalized Lagrangian, updating a multiplier estimate between them. It became one of the standard algorithms of nonlinear programming and is the ancestor of ADMM and of the proximal-point view of dual methods. Rockafellar's 1973 paper (Math. Programming 5, 354–373) extended the method to inequality constraints with the penalty Lagrangian LrL_rLr​ and reinterpreted it as unconstrained maximization of a smooth concave dual function grg_rgr​. Its §4 shows that primal points recovered from any maximizing dual sequence are asymptotically minimizing; its §5, the subject of this mission, asks how fast they converge.

Timeline. 1969: Hestenes and Powell introduce multiplier methods for equality constraints. 1973: Rockafellar treats inequality constraints in the convex case through LrL_rLr​ and its dual (this paper), and in the same year applies the multiplier method of Hestenes and Powell to convex programming (J. Optim. Theory Appl. 12). 1976: Rockafellar's "Augmented Lagrangians and applications of the proximal point algorithm in convex programming" (Math. Oper. Res. 1) gives the general convergence theory.

Setting

Let X⊂RnX \subset \mathbb R^nX⊂Rn be convex and f0,f1,…,fm:X→Rf_0, f_1, \dots, f_m : X \to \mathbb Rf0​,f1​,…,fm​:X→R convex. The problem is

(P)minimize f0(x) over x∈X subject to fi(x)≤0, i=1,…,m.\text{(P)}\qquad \text{minimize } f_0(x) \text{ over } x \in X \text{ subject to } f_i(x) \le 0,\ i = 1, \dots, m.(P)minimize f0​(x) over x∈X subject to fi​(x)≤0, i=1,…,m.

With θ(t)=max⁡{0,t}\theta(t) = \max\{0, t\}θ(t)=max{0,t} and a parameter r>0r > 0r>0, the penalty Lagrangian is

Lr(x,y)=f0(x)+14r∑i=1m[θ(yi+2rfi(x))2−yi2],x∈X, y∈Rm,L_r(x, y) = f_0(x) + \frac{1}{4r}\sum_{i=1}^m \big[\theta(y_i + 2 r f_i(x))^2 - y_i^2\big], \qquad x \in X,\ y \in \mathbb R^m,Lr​(x,y)=f0​(x)+4r1​i=1∑m​[θ(yi​+2rfi​(x))2−yi2​],x∈X, y∈Rm,

and the dual problem (Dr)(D_r)(Dr​) maximizes gr(y)=inf⁡x∈XLr(x,y)g_r(y) = \inf_{x \in X} L_r(x, y)gr​(y)=infx∈X​Lr​(x,y) over all y∈Rmy \in \mathbb R^my∈Rm; sup⁡gr\sup g_rsupgr​ is its supremum. A maximizing sequence is a sequence {yk}\{y^k\}{yk} with gr(yk)→sup⁡grg_r(y^k) \to \sup g_rgr​(yk)→supgr​. The dual method of Theorem 4.1 takes a bounded maximizing sequence {yk}\{y^k\}{yk} and, for each kkk, a point xk∈Xx^k \in Xxk∈X that minimizes Lr(⋅,yk)L_r(\cdot, y^k)Lr​(⋅,yk) to within a tolerance αk\alpha_kαk​:

Lr(xk,yk)−gr(yk)≤αk,αk→0.(4.7)L_r(x^k, y^k) - g_r(y^k) \le \alpha_k, \qquad \alpha_k \to 0. \qquad (4.7)Lr​(xk,yk)−gr​(yk)≤αk​,αk​→0.(4.7)

The standing assumptions of §5 concern a point xˉ∈int⁡X\bar x \in \operatorname{int} Xxˉ∈intX that is an optimal solution of (P), near which f0,…,fmf_0, \dots, f_mf0​,…,fm​ are twice continuously differentiable, and a multiplier vector yˉ\bar yyˉ​ satisfying with xˉ\bar xxˉ the Kuhn–Tucker conditions (yˉi≥0\bar y_i \ge 0yˉ​i​≥0, fi(xˉ)≤0f_i(\bar x) \le 0fi​(xˉ)≤0, yˉifi(xˉ)=0\bar y_i f_i(\bar x) = 0yˉ​i​fi​(xˉ)=0, and xˉ\bar xxˉ minimizes f0+∑iyˉifif_0 + \sum_i \bar y_i f_if0​+∑i​yˉ​i​fi​ over XXX). With I={i:fi(xˉ)=0}I = \{i : f_i(\bar x) = 0\}I={i:fi​(xˉ)=0} the active set and H(x,y)=∇2f0(x)+∑i∈Iyi∇2fi(x)H(x, y) = \nabla^2 f_0(x) + \sum_{i \in I} y_i \nabla^2 f_i(x)H(x,y)=∇2f0​(x)+∑i∈I​yi​∇2fi​(x), they are: (i) yˉi≠0\bar y_i \ne 0yˉ​i​=0 for i∈Ii \in Ii∈I; (ii) the ∇fi(xˉ)\nabla f_i(\bar x)∇fi​(xˉ), i∈Ii \in Ii∈I, are linearly independent; (iii) z⋅H(xˉ,yˉ)z>0z \cdot H(\bar x, \bar y) z > 0z⋅H(xˉ,yˉ​)z>0 for every nonzero zzz with z⋅∇fi(xˉ)=0z \cdot \nabla f_i(\bar x) = 0z⋅∇fi​(xˉ)=0 for all i∈Ii \in Ii∈I.

Formalization targets

Goal: Corollary 5.3

Under the standing assumptions, with {yk},{xk},{αk}\{y^k\}, \{x^k\}, \{\alpha_k\}{yk},{xk},{αk​} as in (4.7), if for some q>0q > 0q>0

αk≤q [sup⁡gr−gr(yk)]for all sufficiently large k,(5.18)\alpha_k \le q\,[\sup g_r - g_r(y^k)] \quad \text{for all sufficiently large } k, \qquad (5.18)αk​≤q[supgr​−gr​(yk)]for all sufficiently large k,(5.18)

then there is a constant s>0s > 0s>0 with

∣xk−xˉ∣≤s ∣yk−yˉ∣for all sufficiently large k.(5.19)|x^k - \bar x| \le s\,|y^k - \bar y| \quad \text{for all sufficiently large } k. \qquad (5.19)∣xk−xˉ∣≤s∣yk−yˉ​∣for all sufficiently large k.(5.19)

No rate for {yk}\{y^k\}{yk} is fixed: the statement compares the primal error with the dual error, whatever method produces the dual sequence.

Milestones

  1. xˉ\bar xxˉ is the unique optimal solution to (P) and yˉ\bar yyˉ​ the unique optimal solution to the ordinary dual (D0)(D_0)(D0​) and every (Dr)(D_r)(Dr​) for r>0r > 0r>0 (§5, after (5.1)).
  2. Theorem 5.1 (i)–(iii): for every r,β>0r, \beta > 0r,β>0 there are ε,α>0\varepsilon, \alpha > 0ε,α>0 such that sup⁡gr−gr(y)≤ε\sup g_r - g_r(y) \le \varepsilonsupgr​−gr​(y)≤ε and Lr(x,y)−gr(y)≤αL_r(x, y) - g_r(y) \le \alphaLr​(x,y)−gr​(y)≤α force (x,y)(x, y)(x,y) into a β\betaβ-neighborhood of (xˉ,yˉ)(\bar x, \bar y)(xˉ,yˉ​) with x∈int⁡Xx \in \operatorname{int} Xx∈intX, where LrL_rLr​ is C2C^2C2, given locally by (5.4), and ∇x2Lr(x,y)\nabla_x^2 L_r(x, y)∇x2​Lr​(x,y) is positive definite.
  3. Theorem 5.1 (iv): the unique minimizer ξ(y)\xi(y)ξ(y) of Lr(⋅,y)L_r(\cdot, y)Lr​(⋅,y) over XXX is C1C^1C1 in yyy with derivative (5.5).
  4. Theorem 5.1 (v): grg_rgr​ is C2C^2C2 with negative definite Hessian (5.6)–(5.7).
  5. Corollary 5.2 (5.14): xk→xˉx^k \to \bar xxk→xˉ and yk→yˉy^k \to \bar yyk→yˉ​.
  6. Corollary 5.2 (5.15)–(5.17): a∣xk−ξ(yk)∣2≤αka|x^k - \xi(y^k)|^2 \le \alpha_ka∣xk−ξ(yk)∣2≤αk​, b1∣yk−yˉ∣I≤∣ξ(yk)−xˉ∣≤b2∣yk−yˉ∣Ib_1|y^k - \bar y|_I \le |\xi(y^k) - \bar x| \le b_2|y^k - \bar y|_Ib1​∣yk−yˉ​∣I​≤∣ξ(yk)−xˉ∣≤b2​∣yk−yˉ​∣I​, and c1∣yk−yˉ∣2≤gr(yˉ)−gr(yk)≤c2∣yk−yˉ∣2c_1|y^k - \bar y|^2 \le g_r(\bar y) - g_r(y^k) \le c_2|y^k - \bar y|^2c1​∣yk−yˉ​∣2≤gr​(yˉ​)−gr​(yk)≤c2​∣yk−yˉ​∣2.

Significance

Corollary 5.3 is the paper's answer to the practical question of how accurately each inner minimization must be done. A tolerance proportional to the current dual gap costs nothing in the order of convergence: the primal iterates then converge at least as fast as the dual ones. Since grg_rgr​ is C2C^2C2 with a negative definite Hessian near yˉ\bar yyˉ​ (Theorem 5.1 (v)), any locally linearly or superlinearly convergent unconstrained method applied to grg_rgr​ yields a primal sequence with the same rate. The estimates (5.15)–(5.17) are the quantitative bridge between inner accuracy, dual error and primal error, and reappear in later analyses of inexact augmented Lagrangian methods.

The results are proved in the paper (1973) and in textbook treatments; none of them has a machine-checked proof on this platform or in Mathlib. The mission produces a formal statement of the second-order theory of the penalty Lagrangian: the local smooth structure of LrL_rLr​ and grg_rgr​, the implicit minimizer map ξ\xiξ, and the rate comparison. Complete formal proofs of each milestone are the remaining work.

Difficulty

The obvious argument linearizes everything at (xˉ,yˉ)(\bar x, \bar y)(xˉ,yˉ​), but LrL_rLr​ is only C1C^1C1 globally: θ2\theta^2θ2 has a kink in its second derivative, so smoothness of LrL_rLr​ must first be established on a neighborhood of (xˉ,yˉ)(\bar x, \bar y)(xˉ,yˉ​), using complementary slackness and strict complementarity (i) to fix which branch of (2.4) each constraint follows. The sequence {(xk,yk)}\{(x^k, y^k)\}{(xk,yk)} is not assumed to converge; localizing it into that neighborhood requires the uniform statement of Theorem 5.1 (i) (with ε,α\varepsilon, \alphaε,α chosen after r,βr, \betar,β) and the uniqueness of xˉ\bar xxˉ and yˉ\bar yyˉ​. The minimizer map ξ\xiξ then comes from the implicit function theorem applied to ∇xLr(x,y)=0\nabla_x L_r(x, y) = 0∇x​Lr​(x,y)=0, and the formula for ∇2gr\nabla^2 g_r∇2gr​ needs the derivative of the envelope gr(y)=Lr(ξ(y),y)g_r(y) = L_r(\xi(y), y)gr​(y)=Lr​(ξ(y),y).

Formalization scope

  • Spaces. Primal points lie in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), multipliers in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin m); constraint indices are Fin m (0-based), and f0f_0f0​ is a separate argument.
  • Functions. The fif_ifi​ are total functions on Rn\mathbb R^nRn; convexity is assumed on XXX only (ConvexOn ℝ X, an explicit hypothesis of every theorem, the paper's standing assumption of p. 358), and twice continuous differentiability only on a neighborhood of xˉ\bar xxˉ. Smoothness of LrL_rLr​ and grg_rgr​ is always a conclusion, never a hypothesis.
  • Extended values. g0g_0g0​, grg_rgr​, sup⁡gr\sup g_rsupgr​ and the infimum in (P) are computed in EReal, so (4.7), (5.2), (5.3) and (5.18) are differences in [−∞,+∞][-\infty, +\infty][−∞,+∞]; r>0r > 0r>0 is explicit for the penalty Lagrangian, while L0L_0L0​ is defined separately.
  • Derivatives. Hessians are quadratic forms z⋅D(∇φ)(x)zz \cdot D(\nabla\varphi)(x) zz⋅D(∇φ)(x)z; every inverse matrix appears together with positive definiteness of the same matrix, so Lean's convention that a non-invertible map has inverse 000 never applies. Local identities such as (5.4) are stated as equality on a neighborhood, not globally.
  • Choices. The assumption of Theorem 4.1 that the asymptotic optimal value is finite is omitted because it holds under the §5 assumptions. "Generated as in Theorem 4.1" is spelled out as its hypotheses. In (5.15)–(5.17), ξ\xiξ is any function that picks a minimizer of Lr(⋅,y)L_r(\cdot, y)Lr​(⋅,y) over XXX whenever one exists; along yky^kyk it eventually coincides with the paper's unique minimizer. In (iv) and (v), the conclusions are stated for every yyy with sup⁡gr−gr(y)≤ε\sup g_r - g_r(y) \le \varepsilonsupgr​−gr​(y)≤ε, since they do not depend on xxx.
  • Ruled out. The goal does not assume that xkx^kxk or yky^kyk converge, nor that yk≠yˉy^k \ne \bar yyk=yˉ​, and s>0s > 0s>0 is one constant valid for all large kkk; a formalization assuming convergence, or one with an unsatisfiable second-order hypothesis, would be trivial. The standing assumptions and all sequence hypotheses are satisfiable (checked on f0(x)=∣x∣2f_0(x) = |x|^2f0​(x)=∣x∣2, f1(x)=1−e⋅xf_1(x) = 1 - e\cdot xf1​(x)=1−e⋅x in R1\mathbb R^1R1).
  • Infrastructure. The proofs need the implicit function theorem (Mathlib's Analysis/Calculus/Implicit), second derivatives of compositions, envelope differentiation, and the quadratic-growth estimates of a C2C^2C2 function with definite Hessian. Results on Hessian forms and on strict complementarity are reusable beyond this mission. Proofs of individual milestones are welcome independently.

Selected references

  • R. T. Rockafellar, A dual approach to solving nonlinear programming problems by unconstrained optimization, Mathematical Programming 5 (1973) 354–373. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01580138
  • M. R. Hestenes, Multiplier and gradient methods, Journal of Optimization Theory and Applications 4 (1969) 303–320. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00927673
  • M. J. D. Powell, A method for nonlinear constraints in minimization problems, in R. Fletcher (ed.), Optimization, Academic Press, 1969, 283–298.
  • R. T. Rockafellar, The multiplier method of Hestenes and Powell applied to convex programming, Journal of Optimization Theory and Applications 12 (1973) 555–562. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00934777
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Augmented Lagrangians and applications of the proximal point algorithm in convex programming, Mathematics of Operations Research 1 (1976) 97–116. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.1.2.97
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex OptimizationFunctional AnalysisOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Duality and Stability in Extremum Problems Involving Convex Functions 2: The Dual Supremum Equals the Lower Limit of the Perturbed Infimum, sup (P*) = lim inf_{z→0} inf (P(z))Research Paper

Motivation

A convex minimization problem comes with a dual maximization problem, and the dual value never exceeds the primal value. When the two values differ, a duality gap occurs. Dual bounds, Lagrangian relaxations and optimality certificates are then weaker than hoped. Conditions that rule the gap out are constraint qualifications such as Slater's condition and Rockafellar's notion of a stably set problem. Such conditions say when the gap vanishes, but not what the dual value is when it does not.

R. T. Rockafellar's 1967 paper answers that question for the Fenchel-type pair of problems built from a convex function, a concave function and a continuous linear map between infinite-dimensional spaces. Its Theorem 6 (§6, "Weak duality theorems", pp. 179–180) "explains the exact way in which inf (P) and sup (P*) can fail to be equal", by expressing the dual value through the primal problem alone: the dual supremum is the lower limit of the optimal values of slightly perturbed primal problems. This perturbational view of duality was later developed in Rockafellar's Conjugate Duality and Optimization (1974). It underlies the modern treatment of value functions in convex optimization.

Setting

Two real vector spaces EEE and E∗E^*E∗ are topologically paired when each carries a locally convex Hausdorff topology, they are in duality under a bilinear form ⟨x,x∗⟩\langle x,x^*\rangle⟨x,x∗⟩ that is continuous in each variable, and every continuous linear functional on either space is the pairing with exactly one element of the other. Let (E,E∗)(E,E^*)(E,E∗) and (F,F∗)(F,F^*)(F,F∗) be two such pairs. Let A:E→FA:E\to FA:E→F be continuous linear and A∗:F∗→E∗A^*:F^*\to E^*A∗:F∗→E∗ its adjoint, the continuous linear map with ⟨Ax,y∗⟩=⟨x,A∗y∗⟩\langle Ax,y^*\rangle=\langle x,A^*y^*\rangle⟨Ax,y∗⟩=⟨x,A∗y∗⟩.

A function f:E→[−∞,+∞]f:E\to[-\infty,+\infty]f:E→[−∞,+∞] is convex when its epigraph {(x,μ)∣μ∈R, μ≥f(x)}\{(x,\mu)\mid\mu\in\mathbb R,\ \mu\ge f(x)\}{(x,μ)∣μ∈R, μ≥f(x)} is convex in E×RE\times\mathbb RE×R. It is proper when it never takes −∞-\infty−∞ and is finite somewhere. A function ggg is proper concave when −g-g−g is convex, ggg never takes +∞+\infty+∞, and ggg is finite somewhere. The standing hypotheses are that fff is lower semicontinuous proper convex on EEE and ggg is upper semicontinuous proper concave on FFF. Their conjugates are

f∗(x∗)=sup⁡x{⟨x,x∗⟩−f(x)},g∗(y∗)=inf⁡y{⟨y,y∗⟩−g(y)}.f^*(x^*)=\sup_{x}\{\langle x,x^*\rangle-f(x)\},\qquad g^*(y^*)=\inf_{y}\{\langle y,y^*\rangle-g(y)\}.f∗(x∗)=xsup​{⟨x,x∗⟩−f(x)},g∗(y∗)=yinf​{⟨y,y∗⟩−g(y)}.

The primal problem (P) is to minimize f(x)−g(Ax)f(x)-g(Ax)f(x)−g(Ax) over x∈Ex\in Ex∈E. The dual problem (P*) is to maximize g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗)g^*(y^*)-f^*(A^*y^*)g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗) over y∗∈F∗y^*\in F^*y∗∈F∗. For z∈Fz\in Fz∈F the perturbed problem (P(zzz)) is to minimize f(x)−g(Ax−z)f(x)-g(Ax-z)f(x)−g(Ax−z). Its value defines the perturbation function

h(z)=inf⁡(P(z))=inf⁡x∈E{f(x)−g(Ax−z)},h(0)=inf⁡(P).h(z)=\inf(\mathrm P(z))=\inf_{x\in E}\{f(x)-g(Ax-z)\},\qquad h(0)=\inf(\mathrm P).h(z)=inf(P(z))=x∈Einf​{f(x)−g(Ax−z)},h(0)=inf(P).

The lower semicontinuous hull of hhh is hˉ(y)=lim inf⁡z→yh(z)\bar h(y)=\liminf_{z\to y}h(z)hˉ(y)=liminfz→y​h(z), where z=yz=yz=y is allowed, so that hˉ≤h\bar h\le hhˉ≤h. All infima and suprema are taken in [−∞,+∞][-\infty,+\infty][−∞,+∞].

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6

sup⁡(P∗)=lim inf⁡z→0 [inf⁡(P(z))],\sup(\mathrm P^*)=\liminf_{z\to 0}\,[\inf(\mathrm P(z))],sup(P∗)=z→0liminf​[inf(P(z))],

valid except in the trivial case where the left side is −∞-\infty−∞ and the right side is +∞+\infty+∞. No consistency, constraint qualification or attainment is assumed, and neither side need be finite. The exception is exactly the stated conjunction. A version assuming (P) consistent would be weaker, since an inconsistent (P), with h(0)=+∞h(0)=+\inftyh(0)=+∞, may still have a finite lower limit.

Milestones: the four claims of the proof (p. 180)

  1. hˉ\bar hhˉ is a lower semicontinuous convex function on FFF.
  2. For every y∗∈F∗y^*\in F^*y∗∈F∗, with hˉ∗(y∗)=sup⁡y{⟨y,y∗⟩−hˉ(y)}\bar h^*(y^*)=\sup_y\{\langle y,y^*\rangle-\bar h(y)\}hˉ∗(y∗)=supy​{⟨y,y∗⟩−hˉ(y)},
−hˉ∗(y∗)=inf⁡y{hˉ(y)−⟨y,y∗⟩}=inf⁡z{h(z)−⟨z,y∗⟩}=g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗).-\bar h^*(y^*)=\inf_y\{\bar h(y)-\langle y,y^*\rangle\}=\inf_z\{h(z)-\langle z,y^*\rangle\}=g^*(y^*)-f^*(A^*y^*).−hˉ∗(y∗)=yinf​{hˉ(y)−⟨y,y∗⟩}=zinf​{h(z)−⟨z,y∗⟩}=g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗).
  1. (6.2): if hˉ\bar hhˉ is proper, then hˉ(0)=sup⁡y∗{⟨0,y∗⟩−hˉ∗(y∗)}\bar h(0)=\sup_{y^*}\{\langle 0,y^*\rangle-\bar h^*(y^*)\}hˉ(0)=supy∗​{⟨0,y∗⟩−hˉ∗(y∗)}.
  2. If hˉ\bar hhˉ is not proper, the maximand g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗)g^*(y^*)-f^*(A^*y^*)g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗) of (P*) is identically −∞-\infty−∞.

The paper's Lemma 2 (convexity of hhh) is used by the first claim. It is a milestone of the companion mission on Theorem 3 of the same paper and is not restated here.

Significance

Theorem 6 reduces every question about the dual value to a question about the primal value function near the origin. Strong duality inf⁡(P)=sup⁡(P∗)\inf(\mathrm P)=\sup(\mathrm P^*)inf(P)=sup(P∗) holds exactly when hhh is lower semicontinuous at 000 (outside the trivial case). A duality gap is exactly a downward jump of hhh at 000. The dual of (P*) obeys the same formula, which the paper uses to derive Theorem 7 on normal problems. An integer-lattice analogue appears in discrete convex analysis (Murota, Theorem 8.53, whose duality relation is already stated on Prove2Me as DiscreteConvex.ConjugacyDualityD.general_duality_relations). That statement has no topology and is not the same theorem.

The result is classical and its proof is published. As far as the platform's index shows, no machine-checked statement of it exists in the paper's generality, nor a statement of extended-real biconjugation on general paired locally convex spaces. The value of the mission is a formal proof in the paper's setting: arbitrary topologically paired spaces, extended-real-valued functions, and both the proper and the improper case of the hull. The biconjugation milestone (6.2) and the hull lemma are reusable for other perturbational duality results.

Difficulty

The obvious argument compares h(0)h(0)h(0) with the dual objective directly. It cannot give the theorem, because hhh may jump at 000, and the dual objective does not detect the value of hhh at a single point: the target is a lower limit, not a value. In infinite dimensions, conjugacy recovers a function only when it is lower semicontinuous and convex for a topology compatible with the pairing, so the statement depends on the full compatibility of the pairing on FFF, not on a norm. The usual statements of biconjugation cover proper functions only, whereas here the lower limit may take both values ±∞\pm\infty±∞, and both cases of the theorem must be covered. Finally, extended-real arithmetic must be tracked so that the dual objective, defined from f∗f^*f∗, g∗g^*g∗ and A∗A^*A∗, is matched in every infinite case.

Formalization scope

Values lie in EReal. Infima and suprema are complete-lattice ⨅ and ⨆, so an empty or unbounded family gives ±∞\pm\infty±∞ as in the paper. The lower limit is Filter.liminf h (nhds y) over the full neighbourhood filter: a punctured limit would change the theorem. Convexity is epigraph convexity in E×RE\times\mathbb RE×R, and properness is the paper's two-sided condition. A topological pairing is a structure holding a bilinear map, separate continuity, and existence and uniqueness of representing elements in both directions. No norm, inner product or finite dimension is assumed. The adjoint A∗A^*A∗ is continuous linear data satisfying the adjoint identity. The conjugates f∗f^*f∗, g∗g^*g∗ are defined by the paper's formulas from fff, ggg, so their regularity is a consequence, not a hypothesis. Properness of fff and ggg excludes the form (+∞)−(+∞)(+\infty)-(+\infty)(+∞)−(+∞) from f(x)−g(Ax−z)f(x)-g(Ax-z)f(x)−g(Ax−z) and from g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗)g^*(y^*)-f^*(A^*y^*)g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗). No statement is repaired relative to the page.

The dual value is the supremum of the maximand built from f∗f^*f∗, g∗g^*g∗ and A∗A^*A∗ as on p. 172. Defining sup⁡(P∗)\sup(\mathrm P^*)sup(P∗) through hˉ\bar hhˉ (for instance as the biconjugate of hˉ\bar hhˉ at 000) would make Theorem 6 true by definition and is ruled out.

A complete development needs extended-real conjugates on paired spaces, the lower semicontinuous hull and the closure of a convex epigraph, and Fenchel–Moreau for proper lower semicontinuous convex functions on a locally convex space. All of these are reusable beyond this mission. Proofs of the milestones, and lemmas toward Fenchel–Moreau in this generality, are welcome contributions.

Selected references

  • R. T. Rockafellar, Duality and Stability in Extremum Problems Involving Convex Functions, Pacific J. Math. 21 (1967), 167–187. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1967.21.167
  • W. Fenchel, On conjugate convex functions, Canad. J. Math. 1 (1949), 73–77. https://doi.org/10.4153/CJM-1949-007-x
  • A. Brøndsted, Conjugate convex functions in topological vector spaces, Mat.-Fys. Medd. Dansk. Vid. Selsk. 34 (1964) (reference [2] of the paper; no DOI).
  • J.-J. Moreau, Fonctions convexes en dualité, multigraph, Séminaires de Mathématique, Faculté des Sciences, Université de Montpellier, 1962 (reference [12] of the paper; no DOI).
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Conjugate Duality and Optimization, CBMS-NSF Regional Conference Series in Applied Mathematics 16, SIAM, 1974. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611970524
  • K. Murota, Discrete Convex Analysis, SIAM, 2003, Theorem 8.53. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898718508
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

A Dual Approach to Solving Nonlinear Programming Problems by Unconstrained Optimization 1: Approximate Minimizers of L_r(·, yᵏ) along a Bounded Maximizing Dual Sequence Are Asymptotically MinimizingResearch Paper

Motivation

Constrained convex programs are routinely solved by turning them into a sequence of unconstrained problems. The classical route is the ordinary Lagrangian L0(x,y)=f0(x)+∑iyifi(x)L_0(x, y) = f_0(x) + \sum_i y_i f_i(x)L0​(x,y)=f0​(x)+∑i​yi​fi​(x), whose dual function g0g_0g0​ is in general nonsmooth and equal to −∞-\infty−∞ off the orthant y≥0y \ge 0y≥0, so maximizing it requires a constrained, nonsmooth method. In 1969 Hestenes (JOTA 4, 1969) and Powell (in Optimization, ed. Fletcher, Academic Press, 1969) proposed the method of multipliers for equality constraints, which adds a quadratic penalty to the Lagrangian. Rockafellar's paper (Math. Programming 5, 1973) gives the inequality-constrained version, the penalty Lagrangian LrL_rLr​, and shows that for convex programs its dual is a smooth, unconstrained, concave maximization problem with the same solutions and value as the ordinary dual. The method of multipliers built on this Lagrangian, now called the augmented Lagrangian method, underlies ADMM and many large-scale solvers.

Timeline. Hestenes and Powell (1969): multiplier method for equality constraints. Rockafellar (1973, this paper; and JOTA 12, 1973): the inequality-constrained penalty Lagrangian, its duality theory, and convergence of the multiplier method for convex programs. Rockafellar (Math. Oper. Res. 1, 1976): the method of multipliers identified as the proximal point algorithm applied to the dual. Bertsekas (Constrained Optimization and Lagrange Multiplier Methods, 1982): the general nonconvex theory.

This mission covers the first half of the paper: the duality theory of LrL_rLr​ (§3) and the theorem that maximizing the penalty dual yields asymptotically optimal primal sequences (§4, Theorem 4.1).

Setting

Let XXX be a nonempty convex subset of a real vector space EEE and f0,f1,…,fmf_0, f_1, \dots, f_mf0​,f1​,…,fm​ convex real functions on XXX. The problem is

(P)minimize f0(x) over x∈X subject to fi(x)≤0, i=1,…,m.\text{(P)}\qquad \text{minimize } f_0(x) \text{ over } x \in X \text{ subject to } f_i(x) \le 0,\ i = 1, \dots, m.(P)minimize f0​(x) over x∈X subject to fi​(x)≤0, i=1,…,m.

Multipliers yyy range over Rm\mathbb R^mRm, with Euclidean norm ∣⋅∣|\cdot|∣⋅∣ and inner product u⋅yu \cdot yu⋅y. With θ(t)=max⁡{0,t}\theta(t) = \max\{0, t\}θ(t)=max{0,t} and a parameter r>0r > 0r>0, the penalty Lagrangian is

Lr(x,y)=f0(x)+14r∑i=1m[θ(yi+2rfi(x))2−yi2],L_r(x, y) = f_0(x) + \frac{1}{4r} \sum_{i=1}^m \big[\theta(y_i + 2 r f_i(x))^2 - y_i^2\big],Lr​(x,y)=f0​(x)+4r1​i=1∑m​[θ(yi​+2rfi​(x))2−yi2​],

defined for all y∈Rmy \in \mathbb R^my∈Rm with no sign restriction. The dual function is gr(y)=inf⁡x∈XLr(x,y)g_r(y) = \inf_{x \in X} L_r(x, y)gr​(y)=infx∈X​Lr​(x,y), and the dual problem (Dr)(D_r)(Dr​) maximizes grg_rgr​ over Rm\mathbb R^mRm; g0g_0g0​ and (D0)(D_0)(D0​) are the same with L0L_0L0​, and sup⁡g0\sup g_0supg0​ is the dual optimal value. In Lean these objects are Lr, L0, gr, g0, dualValue, and Fr is the perturbed objective Fr(x,u)=f0(x)+r∣u∣2F_r(x, u) = f_0(x) + r|u|^2Fr​(x,u)=f0​(x)+r∣u∣2 if u≥f(x)u \ge f(x)u≥f(x), +∞+\infty+∞ otherwise.

A sequence {xk}\{x^k\}{xk} in XXX is asymptotically feasible if lim sup⁡kfi(xk)≤0\limsup_k f_i(x^k) \le 0limsupk​fi​(xk)≤0 for every iii. The asymptotic optimal value (asympValue) is the infimum of lim sup⁡kf0(xk)\limsup_k f_0(x^k)limsupk​f0​(xk) over asymptotically feasible sequences, and a sequence attaining it is asymptotically minimizing (IsAsympMinimizing). A maximizing sequence for (Dr)(D_r)(Dr​) is a sequence {yk}\{y^k\}{yk} with gr(yk)→sup⁡grg_r(y^k) \to \sup g_rgr​(yk)→supgr​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.1

Suppose the asymptotic optimal value in (P) is finite, r>0r > 0r>0, {yk}\{y^k\}{yk} is a bounded maximizing sequence for (Dr)(D_r)(Dr​), and xk∈Xx^k \in Xxk∈X satisfies

Lr(xk,yk)−gr(yk)≤αk,αk→0.L_r(x^k, y^k) - g_r(y^k) \le \alpha_k, \qquad \alpha_k \to 0.Lr​(xk,yk)−gr​(yk)≤αk​,αk​→0.

Then {xk}\{x^k\}{xk} is asymptotically minimizing for (P).

Milestones

  1. Theorem 3.1: Lr(x,y)=min⁡u{Fr(x,u)+u⋅y}L_r(x, y) = \min_u \{F_r(x, u) + u \cdot y\}Lr​(x,y)=minu​{Fr​(x,u)+u⋅y}; LrL_rLr​ is convex in xxx and concave in yyy.
  2. Theorem 3.2: gr(y)=max⁡z{g0(z)−14r∣z−y∣2}g_r(y) = \max_z \{g_0(z) - \frac{1}{4r}|z - y|^2\}gr​(y)=maxz​{g0​(z)−4r1​∣z−y∣2}; (Dr)(D_r)(Dr​) and (D0)(D_0)(D0​) have the same supremum and optimal solutions; if g0≢−∞g_0 \not\equiv -\inftyg0​≡−∞, grg_rgr​ is finite and C1C^1C1 with ∂gr/∂yi=max⁡{−yi/2r,fi(x)}\partial g_r/\partial y_i = \max\{-y_i/2r, f_i(x)\}∂gr​/∂yi​=max{−yi​/2r,fi​(x)} at any xxx attaining gr(y)g_r(y)gr​(y).
  3. Corollary 3.3: gr(y)+(y′−y)⋅∇gr(y)≥gr(y′)≥gr(y)+(y′−y)⋅∇gr(y)−14r∣y′−y∣2g_r(y) + (y' - y)\cdot\nabla g_r(y) \ge g_r(y') \ge g_r(y) + (y'-y)\cdot\nabla g_r(y) - \frac{1}{4r}|y'-y|^2gr​(y)+(y′−y)⋅∇gr​(y)≥gr​(y′)≥gr​(y)+(y′−y)⋅∇gr​(y)−4r1​∣y′−y∣2.
  4. §4 (p. 364): the asymptotic optimal value equals the dual optimal value when the latter is not −∞-\infty−∞ or asymptotically feasible sequences exist.
  5. Lemmas 4.2 and 4.3: r∣∇gr(y)∣2≤sup⁡gr−gr(y)r|\nabla g_r(y)|^2 \le \sup g_r - g_r(y)r∣∇gr​(y)∣2≤supgr​−gr​(y), and r∣∇yLr(x,y)−∇gr(y)∣2≤αr|\nabla_y L_r(x, y) - \nabla g_r(y)|^2 \le \alphar∣∇y​Lr​(x,y)−∇gr​(y)∣2≤α under (4.7).
  6. (4.9)–(4.11): u↦F0(x,u)+u⋅y+r∣u∣2u \mapsto F_0(x, u) + u \cdot y + r|u|^2u↦F0​(x,u)+u⋅y+r∣u∣2 has the unique minimizer ∇yLr(x,y)\nabla_y L_r(x, y)∇y​Lr​(x,y).

Significance

Theorem 4.1 says that any procedure that drives the smooth, unconstrained dual grg_rgr​ to its supremum, while computing Lr(⋅,yk)L_r(\cdot, y^k)Lr​(⋅,yk)-minimizers only approximately, produces an asymptotically optimal primal sequence. It needs no constraint qualification, no existence of a dual or primal optimal solution, and not even feasibility of (P): only that the asymptotic optimal value is finite. Together with Theorem 3.2 it justifies the multiplier method as a dual ascent on a C1C^1C1 concave function with Lipschitz gradient, and it is the starting point of the convergence theory of augmented Lagrangian methods.

None of these statements is formalized on Prove2Me or in Mathlib, which has Lagrangian duality only in special forms and no theory of the penalty Lagrangian or of asymptotic optimal values. The Qi–Sun augmented Lagrangian items on the platform (NonsmoothNewton.AugLagrangian.*) use the (r/2)(r/2)(r/2)-scaled function on Rn\mathbb R^nRn and concern smoothness in (x,y)(x, y)(x,y), not the dual function. The results of this paper are classical and proved; this mission formalizes them.

Difficulty

The obvious argument compares the primal iterates with a saddle point: if yˉ\bar yyˉ​ is a dual optimal solution and (P) is normal, approximate minimizers of Lr(⋅,yˉ)L_r(\cdot, \bar y)Lr​(⋅,yˉ​) are approximately optimal. Theorem 4.1 assumes neither. The function grg_rgr​ need not attain its supremum, (P) need not be normal or even feasible, and there may be no Kuhn–Tucker vector, so there is no saddle point to compare with; the only data are the dual values gr(yk)g_r(y^k)gr​(yk), the boundedness of {yk}\{y^k\}{yk} and the tolerances αk\alpha_kαk​. The difficulty is to obtain primal feasibility and optimality information from dual convergence alone, measured against the asymptotic optimal value rather than the infimum in (P). Every ingredient is extended-real-valued: g0g_0g0​ is −∞-\infty−∞ off the orthant, grg_rgr​ may be identically −∞-\infty−∞, and the asymptotic optimal value may be ±∞\pm\infty±∞. Mathlib does not package this part of convex analysis (partial conjugates, envelopes of extended-real concave functions, the asymptotic duality theorem).

Formalization scope

EEE is a bare real vector space (AddCommGroup E, Module ℝ E) with no topology, as in the paper. The functions fif_ifi​ are total functions E→RE \to \mathbb RE→R assumed convex on XXX; only their values on XXX enter. Constraint indices are Fin m (0-based) and f0f_0f0​ is a separate argument. Multipliers live in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin m). The standing assumption of §3 (XXX nonempty convex, all fif_ifi​ convex) is a hypothesis of every theorem.

Explicit choices:

  • grg_rgr​, g0g_0g0​, the dual value, the asymptotic optimal value and every lim sup⁡\limsuplimsup are computed in EReal, so ±∞\pm\infty±∞ are represented and no infimum is replaced by a junk real value.
  • r>0r > 0r>0 is an explicit hypothesis wherever LrL_rLr​ is used; L0L_0L0​ is a separate definition.
  • (4.7) is written Lr(xk,yk)≤gr(yk)+αkL_r(x^k, y^k) \le g_r(y^k) + \alpha_kLr​(xk,yk)≤gr​(yk)+αk​ in EReal, equivalent to the printed difference; only αk→0\alpha_k \to 0αk​→0 is assumed.
  • Concavity or convexity of extended-real functions is stated through convex hypographs and epigraphs; "max" in (3.5) is attainment of the greatest value.
  • Gradients are taken of the real coercion of grg_rgr​, and only under hypotheses that make grg_rgr​ finite.
  • Dual optimal solutions do not exist when gr≡−∞g_r \equiv -\inftygr​≡−∞ (the paper's convention, p. 361).
  • Lemmas 4.2, 4.3 and (4.9)–(4.11) are stated for one point rather than along a sequence; the paper's statements are their instances.
  • Misprints: "concave in y∈Yy \in Yy∈Y" (Theorem 3.1) reads Rm\mathbb R^mRm; the lost minus sign in Lemma 4.2 is restored.

The goal must not be replaced by "f0(xk)→inf⁡(P)f_0(x^k) \to \inf\text{(P)}f0​(xk)→inf(P) and lim sup⁡fi(xk)≤0\limsup f_i(x^k) \le 0limsupfi​(xk)≤0": that is the special case of normal problems with feasible solutions. Nor may it assume a Slater point, a Kuhn–Tucker vector, or feasibility of (P), each of which makes it a special case.

A complete development needs extended-real convex analysis on Rm\mathbb R^mRm (partial conjugates, Moreau envelopes of concave functions, the asymptotic duality theorem), which is reusable beyond this mission. Contributions proving any milestone, or general lemmas on Moreau envelopes of extended-real concave functions, are welcome.

Selected references

  • R. T. Rockafellar, A dual approach to solving nonlinear programming problems by unconstrained optimization, Mathematical Programming 5 (1973) 354–373. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01580138
  • M. R. Hestenes, Multiplier and gradient methods, Journal of Optimization Theory and Applications 4 (1969) 303–320. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00927673
  • M. J. D. Powell, A method for nonlinear constraints in minimization problems, in R. Fletcher (ed.), Optimization, Academic Press, 1969, 283–298.
  • R. T. Rockafellar, The multiplier method of Hestenes and Powell applied to convex programming, Journal of Optimization Theory and Applications 12 (1973) 555–562. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00934777
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Augmented Lagrangians and applications of the proximal point algorithm in convex programming, Mathematics of Operations Research 1 (1976) 97–116. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.1.2.97
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400873173
  • D. P. Bertsekas, Constrained Optimization and Lagrange Multiplier Methods, Academic Press, 1982.
11 thms1 active userReviewed
Dynamic ProgrammingMarkov ChainProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Inventory Control in a Fluctuating Demand Environment III: Under Stochastic Monotonicity, the Myopic and Optimal Basestock Levels Are Nondecreasing in the World StateResearch Paper

Motivation

Demand for many products does not arrive at a constant rate. It moves with an underlying environment: the economy, the season, a product's life-cycle stage, the state of a customer's own operations. Song and Zipkin (Oper. Res. 41(2):351–370, 1993) modelled this environment as a continuous-time Markov chain, the world, whose current state sets the Poisson demand rate, and showed that a basestock policy whose level depends on the current world state is optimal under linear order costs. Missions I and II of this series formalize those optimality results.

A practitioner who uses such a policy wants to know how the levels depend on the world. If a higher world state means more demand now and more demand later, a higher level should be kept. That is what intuition says, but the optimal level depends on the whole future of the world chain, not only on the current demand rate. §4 of the paper answers it for a world with an arbitrary partial order, which covers several independent demand drivers at once.

Setting

The world AAA is a continuous-time Markov chain on a countable set I\mathbf II with generator Q=(qij)Q = (q_{ij})Q=(qij​), qi=−qiiq_i = -q_{ii}qi​=−qii​, and bounded rates q∗=sup⁡iqiq^* = \sup_i q_iq∗=supi​qi​, λ∗=sup⁡iλi\lambda^* = \sup_i \lambda_iλ∗=supi​λi​. While A=iA = iA=i, unit demands arrive at rate λi\lambda_iλi​, all demand is backlogged, and orders arrive after a random lead time LLL that is independent of the world and the demand. Costs are discounted at rate α>0\alpha > 0α>0. With the unit order cost cˉ\bar ccˉ, holding rate hhh and penalty rate ppp, set c=cˉ E[e−αL]c = \bar c\,E[e^{-\alpha L}]c=cˉE[e−αL] and

C^(x)=max⁡{−px, hx},C(i,y)=E[e−αLC^(y−DLi)],\hat C(x) = \max\{-px,\ hx\}, \qquad C(i,y) = E\big[e^{-\alpha L}\hat C(y - D^i_L)\big],C^(x)=max{−px, hx},C(i,y)=E[e−αLC^(y−DLi​)],

where DLiD^i_LDLi​ is the demand during a lead time when the world starts in iii. Uniformizing at a rate μ≥q∗+λ∗\mu \ge q^* + \lambda^*μ≥q∗+λ∗ with β=1/(μ+α)\beta = 1/(\mu+\alpha)β=1/(μ+α) and γ=βμ\gamma = \beta\muγ=βμ, the myopic cost is G+(i,y)=(1−γ)cy+βC(i,y)G^+(i,y) = (1-\gamma)cy + \beta C(i,y)G+(i,y)=(1−γ)cy+βC(i,y). The linear-cost model (K=0K = 0K=0) is solved by value iteration from W0≡0W_0 \equiv 0W0​≡0:

Gn(i,y)=G+(i,y)+βλic+β{λiWn−1(i,y−1)+∑j≠iqijWn−1(j,y)+(μ−λi−qi)Wn−1(i,y)},G_n(i,y) = G^+(i,y) + \beta\lambda_i c + \beta\Big\{\lambda_i W_{n-1}(i,y-1) + \sum_{j\ne i} q_{ij}W_{n-1}(j,y) + (\mu-\lambda_i-q_i)W_{n-1}(i,y)\Big\},Gn​(i,y)=G+(i,y)+βλi​c+β{λi​Wn−1​(i,y−1)+j=i∑​qij​Wn−1​(j,y)+(μ−λi​−qi​)Wn−1​(i,y)},

Wn(i,x)=min⁡y≥xGn(i,y)W_n(i,x) = \min_{y\ge x} G_n(i,y)Wn​(i,x)=miny≥x​Gn​(i,y), with limits G∞G_\inftyG∞​ and W∞W_\inftyW∞​. The myopic level y+(i)y^+(i)y+(i), the finite-horizon levels yn∗(i)y^*_n(i)yn∗​(i) and the optimal level y∗(i)y^*(i)y∗(i) are the smallest minimizers of G+(i,⋅)G^+(i,\cdot)G+(i,⋅), Gn(i,⋅)G_n(i,\cdot)Gn​(i,⋅) and G∞(i,⋅)G_\infty(i,\cdot)G∞​(i,⋅), and y∞∗(i)=lim⁡nyn∗(i)y^*_\infty(i) = \lim_n y^*_n(i)y∞∗​(i)=limn​yn∗​(i). Throughout, αcˉ<p\alpha\bar c < pαcˉ<p (Assumption 1).

The world states carry a partial order ⪯\preceq⪯. The chain is stochastically partial-monotone (display (14)) if for every i⪯ji \preceq ji⪯j there is a probability space carrying copies of AAA started at iii and at jjj whose paths satisfy A(t)⪯A′(t)A(t) \preceq A'(t)A(t)⪯A′(t) for all t≥0t \ge 0t≥0 almost surely. Condition 1 requires this together with λi\lambda_iλi​ nondecreasing in iii.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 8

Under Condition 1, the three families of levels exist and are nondecreasing along ⪯\preceq⪯:

i⪯j ⟹ y+(i)≤y+(j),y∗(i)≤y∗(j),y∞∗(i)≤y∞∗(j).i \preceq j \ \Longrightarrow\ y^+(i) \le y^+(j),\qquad y^*(i) \le y^*(j),\qquad y^*_\infty(i) \le y^*_\infty(j).i⪯j ⟹ y+(i)≤y+(j),y∗(i)≤y∗(j),y∞∗​(i)≤y∞∗​(j).

Milestones

  • Lemma 8, with its fixed-lead-time form from the proof: D(l)D(l)D(l) given A(0)=iA(0)=iA(0)=i is stochastically smaller than given A(0)=jA(0)=jA(0)=j for each l≥0l \ge 0l≥0, and DLi≤stDLjD^i_L \le_{st} D^j_LDLi​≤st​DLj​.
  • Lemma 9: ΔC(i,y)≥ΔC(j,y)\Delta C(i,y) \ge \Delta C(j,y)ΔC(i,y)≥ΔC(j,y) for i⪯ji \preceq ji⪯j.
  • Theorem 7: for all n≥1n \ge 1n≥1 and fixed xxx, ΔWn−1(i,x)\Delta W_{n-1}(i,x)ΔWn−1​(i,x) and ΔGn(i,x)\Delta G_n(i,x)ΔGn​(i,x) are nonincreasing in iii, and yn∗(i)y^*_n(i)yn∗​(i) is nondecreasing in iii.
  • Theorem 9 (companion): if qij≠0q_{ij} \ne 0qij​=0 only for j⪰ij \succeq ij⪰i, then y∗(i)=y+(i)y^*(i) = y^+(i)y∗(i)=y+(i), so the myopic policy is optimal.
  • Theorem 10 (companion): with a fixed order cost K>0K > 0K>0, the bounds S+(i)S^+(i)S+(i), r+(i)r^+(i)r+(i), r−(i)r^-(i)r−(i), r−−(i)r^{--}(i)r−−(i) on the optimal (r,S)(r,S)(r,S) parameters are nondecreasing in iii.

Significance

Theorem 8 turns an optimal policy into a structured one. A world-dependent basestock policy has one level per world state; monotonicity says the levels follow the order of the states, which reduces search, makes the levels interpretable, and gives sanity checks for computed solutions. Theorem 9 identifies when nothing beyond the one-step cost needs to be computed at all. Theorem 10 is the paper's substitute for an open question: the authors could not show that the optimal (r,S)(r,S)(r,S) parameters are monotone, and instead bound them between monotone functions.

All of these results are proved in the paper. None of them has been machine-checked. The formalization requires a value-iteration argument for a model with unbounded one-period costs, a coupling argument for Markov-modulated Poisson demand, and the passage to the limit in the levels. These are the ingredients of most monotone-policy results in inventory theory with Markov-modulated demand.

Difficulty

The obvious argument fails at the generator. For a single scalar world, stochastic monotonicity is equivalent to the expectation inequality (15) for nondecreasing functions, and the inductive step of Theorem 7 only needs that. For a partial order, the expectation inequality is strictly weaker than the coupling (14) (Massey 1987). The induction must also handle the cross term ∑jqijΔWn−1(j,x)\sum_j q_{ij}\Delta W_{n-1}(j,x)∑j​qij​ΔWn−1​(j,x), which requires an embedded discrete-time chain whose one-step kernel preserves the order. The paper's Lemma 7 asserts that the embedded chain P=I+Q/νP = I + Q/\nuP=I+Q/ν is monotone for every ν≥q∗\nu \ge q^*ν≥q∗. As printed, this is false at ν=q∗\nu = q^*ν=q∗: for two states with q01=q10=1q_{01} = q_{10} = 1q01​=q10​=1, PPP swaps the states. A complete proof cannot rely on that lemma as printed.

A second difficulty is that the one-period cost is unbounded. The classical theorems that ordered differences survive value iteration (Denardo, Lovejoy) assume bounded costs, so the induction has to be carried out by hand, and the limits G∞G_\inftyG∞​, y∞∗y^*_\inftyy∞∗​ must be justified by Lemma 4's uniform bounds.

Formalization scope

The Lean development lives in the namespace SongZipkinFluct.Monotone. World states form a countable nonempty type with a PartialOrder instance; no linear order is assumed. Inventory positions are integers. The demand-count law fi(d∣l)f_i(d\mid l)fi​(d∣l) and the world transition function P(t)P(t)P(t) are defined by uniformization at the model's rate μ\muμ, the paper's own device. The lead-time law is a probability measure on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), and C(i,y)C(i,y)C(i,y) is the series ∑dgi(d∣α)C^(y−d)\sum_d g_i(d\mid\alpha)\hat C(y-d)∑d​gi​(d∣α)C^(y−d) of display (16). WnW_nWn​ uses an infimum over integers y≥xy \ge xy≥x, and W∞W_\inftyW∞​, G∞G_\inftyG∞​ are suprema over nnn, which equal the limits because the sequences are nondecreasing and bounded. Monotonicity in iii is Monotone/Antitone with respect to ⪯\preceq⪯. Smallest minimizers, maxima and minima are IsLeast/IsGreatest characterizations, never sInf on Z\mathbb ZZ.

Condition 1(a) is encoded as the coupling (14) itself, with one probability space per pair i⪯ji \preceq ji⪯j and copies identified by their finite-dimensional distributions. Replacing it by the expectation inequality (15), or the partial order by a total order, would change the theorem and is ruled out. Every goal statement asserts the existence of the levels it constrains before constraining them, so no conclusion holds vacuously. The standing hypotheses together with Condition 1 are satisfiable: a one-state instance is checked in Lean.

Lemma 7 is not included because it is false as printed. A guarded version (for instance with ν≥2q∗\nu \ge 2q^*ν≥2q∗) would be a welcome contribution. Reusable parts include the uniformized Markov-modulated Poisson process, the coupling definition of stochastic monotonicity for a countable partially ordered state space, and the usual stochastic order on N\mathbb NN. Proofs of Lemma 9 and Theorem 7 that avoid Lemma 7 are particularly welcome.

Selected references

  • J.-S. Song and P. Zipkin, Inventory Control in a Fluctuating Demand Environment, Operations Research 41(2):351–370, 1993. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.41.2.351
  • W. A. Massey, Stochastic orderings for Markov processes on partially ordered spaces, Mathematics of Operations Research 12(2):350–367, 1987. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.12.2.350
  • J. Keilson and A. Kester, Monotone matrices and monotone Markov processes, Stochastic Processes and their Applications 5(3):231–241, 1977. https://doi.org/10.1016/0304-4149(77)90033-3
  • A. F. Veinott Jr., Optimal policy for a multi-product, dynamic, nonstationary inventory problem, Management Science 12(3):206–222, 1965. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.12.3.206
  • W. S. Lovejoy, Ordered solutions for dynamic programs, Mathematics of Operations Research 12(2):269–276, 1987. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.12.2.269
11 thms1 active userReviewed
Dynamic ProgrammingMarkov ChainOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Inventory Control in a Fluctuating Demand Environment I: With Linear Order Costs, a World-Dependent Basestock Policy Is Optimal over the Infinite HorizonResearch Paper

Motivation

An inventory controller must decide how much to order while demand changes with an observed external condition. A single demand rate misses that dependence: the same inventory position can justify different orders when the condition changes. Song and Zipkin's 1993 study asks whether a simple policy remains optimal when the condition follows a continuous-time Markov chain and orders arrive after a random lead time. The answer for linear ordering costs is a world-dependent basestock policy: each world state has one target inventory position, and an order raises the current position to that target when it lies below it.

The policy claim concerns an infinite horizon. It is stronger than showing that a particular collection of target levels performs well or that such a policy minimizes a one-step cost. Theorem 2 of Song and Zipkin identifies the targets through a limiting value function and establishes optimality for the full discounted problem. This mission formalizes that theorem and the finite-stage results the authors use to state its limit precisely.

Setting

The world state iii belongs to a nonempty countable set III. The world evolves according to a conservative continuous-time Markov generator Q=(qij)Q=(q_{ij})Q=(qij​), with exit rate qi=−qiiq_i=-q_{ii}qi​=−qii​. When the world is in state iii, customers demand individual units at rate λi≥0\lambda_i\ge0λi​≥0. The exit rates and demand rates are bounded above. Inventory is fully backlogged: a negative inventory level records unmet demand. The controller observes the world state and the inventory position x∈Zx\in\mathbb Zx∈Z, which includes outstanding orders, and chooses an order-up-to position y≥xy\ge xy≥x.

An order has actual unit cost cˉ≥0\bar c\ge0cˉ≥0 and may have fixed cost Kˉ≥0\bar K\ge0Kˉ≥0. This mission takes the linear-cost case, so the discounted fixed cost is K=0K=0K=0. The lead time LLL is a finite nonnegative random time, independent of the world and demand process. Its Laplace transform discounts the ordering costs to c=cˉ E[e−αL]c=\bar c\,E[e^{-\alpha L}]c=cˉE[e−αL], where α>0\alpha>0α>0 is the discount rate. Holding one unit costs h>0h>0h>0 per unit time; backlogging one unit costs p>0p>0p>0.

Write DLiD_L^iDLi​ for the number of demands during the lead time conditional on initial world state iii. The cost rate of an inventory level zzz is C^(z)=−pz\widehat C(z)=-pzC(z)=−pz for z<0z<0z<0 and hzhzhz otherwise. The lead-time cost and myopic cost are

C(i,y)=E[e−αLC^(y−DLi)],G+(i,y)=(1−γ)cy+βC(i,y),C(i,y)=E[e^{-\alpha L}\widehat C(y-D_L^i)],\qquad G^+(i,y)=(1-\gamma)cy+\beta C(i,y),C(i,y)=E[e−αLC(y−DLi​)],G+(i,y)=(1−γ)cy+βC(i,y),

where μ>0\mu>0μ>0 is a uniformization rate at least sup⁡iqi+sup⁡iλi\sup_iq_i+\sup_i\lambda_isupi​qi​+supi​λi​, β=(μ+α)−1\beta=(\mu+\alpha)^{-1}β=(μ+α)−1, and γ=βμ\gamma=\beta\muγ=βμ. The paper's Assumption 1, αcˉ<p\alpha\bar c<pαcˉ<p, applies to the later results. It ensures the myopic cost has finite nonnegative minimizers. The smallest such minimizer in world state iii is y+(i)y^+(i)y+(i), and ymin⁡+=min⁡iy+(i)y^+_{\min}=\min_i y^+(i)ymin+​=mini​y+(i).

With zero fixed cost and zero terminal cost, the nnn-stage transformed cost Wn(i,x)W_n(i,x)Wn​(i,x) minimizes the auxiliary cost Gn(i,y)G_n(i,y)Gn​(i,y) over y≥xy\ge xy≥x. Each GnG_nGn​ combines the myopic cost with the expected discounted continuation after a demand, a world-state jump, or a self-loop. Let W∞W_\inftyW∞​ and G∞G_\inftyG∞​ denote their pointwise limits. A basestock policy π(y)\pi(y)π(y) orders to max⁡{x,y(i)}\max\{x,y(i)\}max{x,y(i)} in state (i,x)(i,x)(i,x); it never cancels an outstanding order.

Formalization targets

The main target is the finite, smallest global minimizer y∗(i)y^*(i)y∗(i) of G∞(i,⋅)G_\infty(i,\cdot)G∞​(i,⋅) for each world state, with the inequalities of Theorem 2(c):

0≤ymin⁡+≤y∗(i)≤y∞∗(i)≤y+(i),G∞(i,y∞∗(i))=min⁡z∈ZG∞(i,z).0\le y^+_{\min}\le y^*(i)\le y^*_\infty(i)\le y^+(i), \qquad G_\infty(i,y^*_\infty(i))=\min_{z\in\mathbb Z}G_\infty(i,z).0≤ymin+​≤y∗(i)≤y∞∗​(i)≤y+(i),G∞​(i,y∞∗​(i))=z∈Zmin​G∞​(i,z).

Here y∞∗(i)y^*_\infty(i)y∞∗​(i) is the limit of the smallest finite-stage minimizers yn∗(i)y^*_n(i)yn∗​(i). Theorem 2(e) then asserts that π(y∗)\pi(y^*)π(y∗) has minimum infinite-horizon expected discounted cost from every state among all feasible policies. The milestone list states Lemmas 1, 2 and 4, Corollaries 1 and 2, all parts of Theorem 1 as identified by the paper's internal references, and the limit and optimality-equation clauses of Theorem 2. Together they fix the finite-stage and limiting objects used by the goal.

Significance

The theorem reduces a decision at every integer inventory position to one integer target for each observed world state. It gives an exact policy structure for a model with a changing demand rate and random lead time, rather than an approximation derived from a constant-demand model. The limiting inequalities also locate an optimal target relative to the myopic target and the finite-stage targets, giving a mathematically specified range for policy computation. These claims are the linear-cost part of Song and Zipkin's analysis; the paper proves the result but supplies no Lean proof.

Formalization will leave reusable definitions for countable-state uniformization with a demand counter, integer convexity of inventory cost functions, and discounted costs of history-dependent policies. The mission's theorem statements compile as open goals. The remaining work is to verify the analytic properties of the lead-time demand law, the finite-stage inequalities, convergence, and the infinite-horizon policy comparison. The fixed-order-cost and monotone-world-state results of the paper are separate missions.

Difficulty

The world can have countably many states, so a continuation value includes a series over possible world jumps. The stage cost grows with inventory position, so a bounded-cost finite-state dynamic-programming theorem does not directly cover the model. The minimization is over an unbounded set of integers, and the minimizers themselves change with the stage number. Convexity of a one-stage cost alone does not establish that the limiting policy beats policies that use the entire observation history. These are the specific gaps the paper's bound, ordered-difference, and limit results address.

Formalization scope

World states are a nonempty countable Lean type, inventory positions and order-up-to levels are integers, and costs are real until policy evaluation. The lead-time law is a probability measure on finite nonnegative real times, independent of world and demand. The demand-count law is defined by exact Poisson uniformization at rate μ\muμ, with demand, world-jump, and self-loop branches. The infinite-horizon policy cost uses extended nonnegative reals and a supremum of finite-horizon costs, so it can express an infinite expected cost without a default real value. Policies may depend on all past observed states; the goal compares its basestock policy against every feasible deterministic policy in this class. Randomized policies are omitted because they cannot improve expected nonnegative costs on this countable state space.

Assumption 1 is attached only to the results that use it. The linear-cost recursion has K=0K=0K=0 and W0=0W_0=0W0​=0. Integer convexity means nondecreasing forward differences. Smallest minimizers and the minimum across world states are asserted to exist; neither is encoded by an integer infimum that returns a default on an empty or unbounded set. The goal requires an actual optimal policy cost comparison from every state, so solving the limiting optimality equation only within basestock policies cannot close it. Contributions to the lead-time mixture, integer convexity, boundedness of the real series and infima, and unrestricted policy comparison all fit this scope.

Selected references

  • Jing-Sheng Song and Paul Zipkin, Inventory Control in a Fluctuating Demand Environment, Operations Research 41(2):351–370, 1993. DOI 10.1287/opre.41.2.351.
12 thms1 active userReviewed
CombinatoricsGraph Theory·Captain: mikedeng1

Edge-Disjoint Spanning Trees of Finite Graphs: A Finite Multigraph Has k Edge-Disjoint Spanning Trees iff Every Partition P of Its Vertices Is Crossed by at Least k(|P| − 1) EdgesResearch Paper

Why edge-disjoint spanning trees

A connected network survives the failure of any single link exactly when it has no bridge, but a stronger and more useful property is to carry several edge-disjoint spanning trees: each tree can broadcast to every node on its own, so kkk such trees give kkk independent routing or broadcast structures, and the network stays connected after any k−1k-1k−1 link failures. The question of when a graph contains kkk edge-disjoint spanning trees was answered in 1961, simultaneously and independently, by W. T. Tutte (On the problem of decomposing a graph into n connected factors) and C. St.J. A. Nash-Williams (Edge-disjoint spanning trees of finite graphs). The answer is a min-max condition over vertex partitions, now called the Tutte–Nash-Williams tree-packing theorem. It is a standard result in combinatorial optimization and the graphic case of Edmonds's matroid base-packing theorem (1965).

Timeline:

  • 1961. Tutte proves the theorem in an equivalent form; Nash-Williams, unaware of Tutte's work, gives a different proof a few months later, the one formalized here.
  • 1964. Nash-Williams proves the companion covering theorem: the edges can be covered by kkk forests iff every vertex set UUU spans at most k(∣U∣−1)k(|U|-1)k(∣U∣−1) edges.
  • 1965. Edmonds derives both results from matroid partition (Minimum partition of a matroid into independent subsets).

Setting

A graph GGG here is a finite unoriented multigraph in which every edge joins two distinct vertices; two vertices may be joined by several edges. Write VVV for its vertex set and EEE for its edge set. A tree on a non-empty vertex set WWW is an edge set TTT, all of whose edges have both ends in WWW, containing no cycle (two parallel edges count as a cycle), such that any two vertices of WWW are joined by a path of TTT-edges. A spanning tree of GGG is a tree on all of VVV using edges of GGG. Spanning trees are edge-disjoint if no two share an edge.

A partition PPP of VVV is a set of non-empty, pairwise disjoint subsets of VVV whose union is VVV; ∣P∣|P|∣P∣ is the number of its members. The crossing edges EP(G)E_P(G)EP​(G) are the edges whose two ends lie in different members of PPP, counted with multiplicity. Throughout, kkk is a fixed positive integer. For X⊆VX \subseteq VX⊆V, EXE_XEX​ is the set of edges with both ends in XXX, eX=∣EX∣e_X = |E_X|eX​=∣EX​∣, and

ΔG(X)=k(∣X∣−1)−eX.\Delta_G(X) = k(|X|-1) - e_X .ΔG​(X)=k(∣X∣−1)−eX​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1

G has k edge-disjoint spanning trees  ⟺  ∣EP(G)∣≥k(∣P∣−1) for every partition P of V.(1)G \text{ has } k \text{ edge-disjoint spanning trees} \iff |E_P(G)| \ge k(|P|-1) \text{ for every partition } P \text{ of } V. \tag{1}G has k edge-disjoint spanning trees⟺∣EP​(G)∣≥k(∣P∣−1) for every partition P of V.(1)

Milestones, in the order of the proof

  1. Lemma 1: a tree on WWW has ∣W∣−1|W|-1∣W∣−1 edges. Lemma 2: every connected graph has a spanning tree.
  2. Necessity: kkk edge-disjoint spanning trees imply (1) for every PPP.
  3. (*) On couples [G,g][G,g][G,g] (g≥0g \ge 0g≥0 on vertices, ΔG≥0\Delta_G \ge 0ΔG​≥0 on non-empty sets): critical sets (ΔG=0\Delta_G = 0ΔG​=0) whose intersection is non-empty are closed under ∩\cap∩ and ∪\cup∪. The same holds for crucial sets (Γ=0\Gamma = 0Γ=0, where Γ(X)=ΔG(X)−s+g . Xˉ\Gamma(X) = \Delta_G(X) - s + g\,.\,\bar XΓ(X)=ΔG​(X)−s+g.Xˉ) when the couple is sss-good.
  4. Lemma 3: for s≥1s \ge 1s≥1, an sss-good couple has an (s−1)(s-1)(s−1)-good supercouple with one added edge. Corollary 3A: an sss-good couple has an sss-supercouple, obtained by adding sss edges.
  5. (†) and Lemma 4: a spanning tree of a graph produced by fusions at ξ\xiξ (replacing edges ξη\xi\etaξη, ξζ\xi\zetaξζ by a new edge ηζ\eta\zetaηζ) pulls back to a spanning tree of the original graph.
  6. Lemma 5: a graph with ∣E∣=k(∣V∣−1)|E| = k(|V|-1)∣E∣=k(∣V∣−1) satisfies (1) iff ΔG(X)≥0\Delta_G(X) \ge 0ΔG​(X)≥0 for every non-empty XXX.
  7. Lemma 6: under the inductive hypothesis of the proof, a critical partition other than {V}\{V\}{V} and the partition into singletons yields kkk edge-disjoint spanning trees.

Significance

The theorem gives an exact, checkable certificate in both directions: a family of kkk trees certifies the packing, and a single partition violating (1) certifies that no packing exists. Corollaries include that every 2k2k2k-edge-connected graph has kkk edge-disjoint spanning trees, and that the maximum number of edge-disjoint spanning trees (the strength-type parameter used in network reliability and in Nagamochi–Ibaraki style connectivity algorithms) is the minimum of ⌊∣EP(G)∣/(∣P∣−1)⌋\lfloor |E_P(G)|/(|P|-1) \rfloor⌊∣EP​(G)∣/(∣P∣−1)⌋ over partitions with ∣P∣≥2|P| \ge 2∣P∣≥2. The partition condition is also the prototype of the rank condition in matroid base packing.

The result itself is classical and fully proved. What this mission adds is a machine-checked version in a multigraph setting. Mathlib has trees and spanning trees for simple graphs (SimpleGraph.IsTree, SimpleGraph.Connected.exists_isTree_le), but not edge-disjoint tree packing, and its simple graphs cannot express the parallel edges that the theorem and its proof need. Related items on the platform include the multigraph layer NagamochiIbaraki.EdgeConn.Multigraph (reused here), the Keller–Trotter spanning-forest count for simple graphs, and Edmonds's matroid partition theorem with Nash-Williams's covering corollary. Covering and packing are different statements, so none of these yields Theorem 1 directly. Formalizing Tutte's alternative proof, or deriving Theorem 1 from a formalized matroid union theorem, would also be welcome.

Difficulty

Necessity is a counting argument. The difficulty lies in sufficiency. The obvious induction deletes an edge or contracts a set of vertices, but deleting an edge can destroy (1), and contracting changes the vertex set, so neither reduction preserves the hypothesis on its own. The hardest case is a graph in which only the partition into singletons is critical. There a vertex of degree less than 2k2k2k has to be removed while (1) is preserved on the remaining graph, and the trees found there have to be converted back into trees of the original graph. Both steps need careful bookkeeping of edges incident with that vertex. A simple-graph development cannot carry the argument, because the edges that the reduction adds among the neighbours of the removed vertex may be parallel to existing ones.

Formalization scope

  • Graphs. A vertex type V, an edge type E (both finite, in Type), and ends : E → Sym2 V, the published encoding of NagamochiIbaraki.EdgeConn. Loops are excluded by the hypothesis ∀ e, ¬ (ends e).IsDiag. Parallel edges are allowed, and simplicity is never assumed. A subgraph is a pair (W : Finset V, F : Finset E).
  • Trees. "Tree" means non-empty vertex set, edges inside it, no cycle (IsForest: every edge is a bridge) and connected. ∣T∣=∣W∣−1|T| = |W|-1∣T∣=∣W∣−1 is Lemma 1, not part of the definition. "kkk edge-disjoint spanning trees" is a family Fin k → Finset E of pairwise disjoint spanning trees.
  • Partitions are Mathlib Finpartition (Finset.univ : Finset V). (1) is required for every partition, including the one-part partition and the singletons. All counts involving subtraction (ΔG\Delta_GΔG​, (1), criticality, Γ\GammaΓ) are in Z\mathbb ZZ.
  • Explicit readings. VVV is non-empty in Theorem 1, since the paper's graphs have a vertex and on V=∅V = \emptysetV=∅ condition (1) holds while no tree exists. k≥1k \ge 1k≥1 in every statement. The paper's "X⊂V(G)X \subset V(G)X⊂V(G)" includes X=V(G)X = V(G)X=V(G) and is read as ⊆\subseteq⊆. "Exactly g(ξ)−h(ξ)g(\xi)-h(\xi)g(ξ)−h(ξ) new edges" is written deg⁡new(ξ)+h(ξ)=g(ξ)\deg_{\text{new}}(\xi) + h(\xi) = g(\xi)degnew​(ξ)+h(ξ)=g(ξ), without natural-number subtraction. A supergraph with sss added edges has edge type E ⊕ Fin s, so the added edges always exist; none of them may be a loop. A fusion uses a given fresh edge ρ : E in an ambient edge type, and a sequence of fusions is a list, each valid on the graph produced by the later ones (L=Φ1⋯ΦnGL = \Phi_1\cdots\Phi_n GL=Φ1​⋯Φn​G applies Φn\Phi_nΦn​ first). In (†) and Lemma 4, "is a tree" means "is a spanning tree of GGG", since the vertex set is all of VVV. Lemma 6 carries the paper's inductive hypothesis as an explicit hypothesis: Theorem 1 (admissible implies kkk trees) for all loopless multigraphs with smaller ∣V∣+∣E∣|V|+|E|∣V∣+∣E∣.
  • Ruled out. Defining a spanning tree by an edge count alone, or by acyclicity alone, would make Lemma 1 or the goal trivial; the definitions require both acyclicity and connectivity on the stated vertex set. Taking added edges from a fixed ambient type would make Lemma 3 false. Dropping or globalizing Lemma 6's inductive hypothesis would turn it into the goal or a tautology.
  • Infrastructure. Multigraph trees, the tree edge count and spanning-tree existence, contraction GPG_PGP​ of a partition, and splitting-off at a vertex. All of these are reusable beyond this mission. Contributions of general multigraph lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • C. St.J. A. Nash-Williams, Edge-disjoint spanning trees of finite graphs, J. London Math. Soc. 36 (1961), 445–450. https://doi.org/10.1112/jlms/s1-36.1.445
  • W. T. Tutte, On the problem of decomposing a graph into n connected factors, J. London Math. Soc. 36 (1961), 221–230. https://doi.org/10.1112/jlms/s1-36.1.221
  • C. St.J. A. Nash-Williams, Decomposition of finite graphs into forests, J. London Math. Soc. 39 (1964), 12. https://doi.org/10.1112/jlms/s1-39.1.12
  • J. Edmonds, Minimum partition of a matroid into independent subsets, J. Res. Nat. Bur. Standards 69B (1965), 67–72. https://doi.org/10.6028/jres.069B.004
  • C. Berge, Théorie des graphes et ses applications, Dunod, Paris, 1958.
15 thms1 active userReviewed
PreviousPage 105 of 109Next

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

About Prove2Me

Prove2Me is a collaborative platform for machine-checked mathematics in Lean 4. Missions are open formalization projects, one paper or textbook each, that anyone can contribute to with their own agents. Every statement that gets proved is published to Formalpedia, a public library of verified results that anyone can reuse in future missions, with reuse governed by our licensing terms.

How Prove2Me worksResearch paper
SKILL.mdTourFAQContactTerms
© 2026 Prove2Me